Home
        1756-6.5.8, ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules, User Manual
         Contents
1.                                                                                                                                                                          End     who_msg EN MSG  Z Type   CIP Generic cEN  Message Control who_msg  gj HEDN gt       ER  COF  COP   Copy File Copy File  Source WHO_Information 2  Source WHO_Information 4   Dest WHO  product_type Dest WHO product_code  Length 2 Length 2  COP  COP   Copy File Copy File  Source WHO_Information 6  Source WHO_Information     Dest  WHO major_revision Dest  WHO minor_revision  Lenath 1 Length 1  COP   Copy File  Source WHO_Information 8   Dest WHO  status  Length 2  COF  COP   Copy File H CopyFile  Source WHO_Information 0  Source WHO_Information 10   Dest WHO  vendor Dest WHO  serialnumber  Length 2 Length 4  COF  COP   Copy File Copy File  Source WHO_Information 15  Source WHO_Information 1 4  Dest WHO ascii_string 0  Dest WHO  string_lenath  Length 32 Length 1  E  4       MainRoutine          f               Using Ladder Logic B 15       Use the table below to understand the values returned for each rung                       Table B D  Rung Values for Example WHO Ladder Logic Application  Rung  Destination Description    Module Identification Retrieved    Rung 1   Product Type Module   s product type  7   Digital 1 0  10   Analog 1 0  Catalog Code Module   s catalog number   Rung 2   Major Revision Module   s major revision  Minor Revision Module   s minor revision  Rung 3   Status Module   s status  Mul
2.                                                                                                                                          Bit 31 Bit 0  1 1 1 1  A communications fault sets all bits in the Module Fault Word   A Fuse Blown  Field Power Loss  No Load or Output Verify  condition sets the appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word   Group 1 Group 0     l l    1  A blown fuse for any point group sets the bit for that  point group in the Fuse Blown Word and also sets the  appropriate bit bits in the Module Fault Word    Group 1 Group 0       1                41457                                                                                              A loss of field power from any group sets the bit for  that point in the Field Power Loss Word and also sets  the appropriate bits in the Module Fault Word    In this chapter you learned about     determining input module compatibility  determining output module compatibility   e using features common to ControlLogix standard digital  I O modules   e using features specific to ControlLogix standard digital  input modules   e using features specific to ControlLogix standard digital  output modules    Move to Chapter 4 to learn about features of the ControlLogix diagnostic  T O module    What This Chapter Contains    Determining Diagnostic Input  Module Compatibility    Chapter 4    ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0  Module Features    This chapter describes devices compatible with ControlLogix I O and  features that 
3.                                              L2 1 L2 1  CN  Daisy chain to other RTBs 40180 M  Simplified schematic LED indicator  IN 0  5V  C 2  VVV a NN              AC INPUT  iy S  o ame l  L2 0      if et K 3  C      i   ST 01234567 0    ST 8 9 101112131415 K I  ser   Control Bus Display 6  Interface  30339 M 20941 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999             Module Specific Information 7 23       1756 IN16 Specifications                                                                            Number of Inputs 16  8 points common   Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis  Backplane Current 100mA   5 1V dc  amp  2mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 0 56W   Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  5 1W   60  C  Thermal Dissipation 17 39 BTU hr  On State Voltage Range 10 30V ac  47 63Hz  Nominal Input Voltage 24V ac  On State Current 5mA   10V ac  60Hz minimum  1 2mA   30V ac  60Hz maximum  Maximum Off State Voltage 5V  Maximum Off State Current 2 75mA  Maximum Input Impedance   30V ac 2 5KQ   60Hz  Input Delay Time  Off to on Programmable filter  Oms  1ms or 2ms  Hardware delay 10ms maximum plus filter time  On to off Programmable filter  9ms or 18ms  Hardware delay 10ms maximum plus filter time  Diagnostic Functions  Change of state Software configurable  Time stamp of inputs     200us  Short Inrush Current 250 mA peak  decaying to  lt 37  in 22ms  without activation   Cyclic Update Time User Selectable  100us minimum 750ms maximum   Isolation Voltage  Group to group 
4.                              Daisy chain to  other RTBs  DC COM 40179 M  Simplified schematic LED indicator  IN 0  5V    DC INPUT  C D  VA VVV e f       Sa 3  GND 0       MV     C  gt  KI    i ST01234567 0                         a ST 8 9 10111213 1415 K b    ControlBus Display  Interface    1 pve                   30350 M 20945 M       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Module Specific Information 7 17       1756 IC16 Specifications                                                                               Number of Inputs 16  8 points common   Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis  Backplane Current 100mA   5 1V dc  amp  3mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 0 58W   Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  5 2W   60  C  Thermal Dissipation 17 73 BTU hr  On State Voltage Range 30 55V dc   60  C all channels  Linear derating   30 60V dc   55  C all channels  Linear derating   Nominal Input Voltage 48V dc  On State Current 2mA   30V dc minimum  7mA   60V dc maximum  Maximum Off State Voltage 10V  Maximum Off State Current 1 5mA  Maximum Input Impedance   60V dc 8 57kQ   Input Delay Time  Off to on Programmable filter  Oms  1ms  or 2ms  Hardware delay 1ms maximum plus filter time  On to off Programmable filter  Oms  1ms  2ms  9ms  or 18ms  Hardware delay 4ms maximum plus filter time  Diagnostic Functions  Change of state Software configurable  Time stamp of inputs     200us  Short Inrush Current 250mA peak  decaying to  lt 37  in 22 ms  without activation   Cyclic Update Tim
5.                          NOTES  All terminals with the same name are Not used   6 ie  L1 0 Loss of Field Power  connected together on the module  Daisy chainto        LU Jl A  For example  L2 can be connected to other RTBs 12 0 ie ic IN 0  any terminal marked L2 0  l  This wiring example shows a single EE L2 0 ie  D IN 1  voltage source  Group 0 T  When you daisy chain from a group to 12 0     IEICE   2 2KO  1 2W   other RTBs  always connect the daisy p _ 5  resistor  chain to the terminal directly L2 0 ie  i IN 3  connected to the supply wire  as i Bi    shown  L2 1 EDI w 4  4 1  L2 1 ice ic IN 5 62kQ  1 2W   Resistors are not necessary if Group 1 l 15 Group 1 5  resistor  Wire Off diagnostic is not used  L2 1 ee   ee  IN 6  To Determine Leakage Resistor ip lan   P S   Field side power supply  L2 1 ie ie  IN 7  ReeakMaximum    P S Voltage 19V ac  1 5mA 2 i  RieakMinimum    P S Voltage 20V ac  2 5mA L2 1 i  ie  L1 1 Loss of Field Power   Recommended Values Cc  PIS Voltage   Rieax  1 2W  5   100V ac   10  43kQ  110V ac   10  47KO  115V ac   10  47KQ  120V ac   10  51kQ                                           LED indicator    Simplified schematic                               5    j   ohh a ee m     ACINPUT      a al  lt  ZJ il    lt     Display  GND pi  T01234567     45V Control Bus Interface FT 01234567 K    WR  J Open wire    t l e  4 m Display DIAGNOSTIC                20927 M    Ja   GND          Control Bus Interface 30340 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Modu
6.                        ia oodo             w  1T          a  N          qq  I          O  I                      N  oo  Ty                                        5    OO  By 0   By oo                       wo  a                                    Daisy chain to other RTBs    Simplified schematic       e    e                bw    GND        gt     IN 0  IN 1  IN 2  IN 3  IN 4  IN 5  IN 6  IN 7  IN 8  IN 9  IN 10  IN 11  IN 12  IN 13  IN 14  IN 15    Not used  Not used         o o   o 11 0      o O      0 L1 2       2 19 o L1 4        ooe       40168 M    LED indicator                 AC INPUT       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Control Bus Display  Interface    ST 012345670  ST 8 9 10111213 1415 K                30338 M    20941 M    Module Specific Information 7 21       1756 IM16l Specifications                                                                               Number of Inputs 16  Individually isolated   Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis  Backplane Current 100mA   5 1V dc  amp  3mA   24V de   Total backplane power 0 58W   Maximum Power Dissipation 5 8W   60  C  Thermal Dissipation 19 78 BTU hr  On State Voltage Range 159 265V ac  47 63Hz   30  C All Channels ON  159 265V ac  47 63Hz   40  C 8 Points ON  159 253V ac  47 63Hz   45  C All Channels ON  159 242V ac  47 63Hz   60  C All Channels ON  Nominal Input Voltage 240V ac  On State Current 5mA   159V ac  60Hz minimum  13mA   265V ac  60Hz maximum  Maximum Off State Voltage 40V ac  Maximum Off Sta
7.                     NEXT     Series of  Application  Specific  Screens   Make       custom   configuration    choices here    Edit a module   s    configuration here X configuration    properties    Configuration complete       Pop up menu  leads to a                     module   s               f       A series of tabs in RSLogix 5000  provide access to change a  module   s configuration data              gt   FINISH                41058    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    6 4 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules       Creating a New Module After you have started RSLogix 5000 and created a controller  you must  create a new module  The wizard allows you to create a new module and  write configuration  You can use default configuration or write specific  configuration for your application     Important  You must be offline when you create a new module                     RSLogix 5000   User_doc  le Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help    alsia a  sele oor     aisle ie  alely   gt   If you are not offline  use this Go Dffine EF  Eh    pull down menu to go offline Diada  Download       Program Mode  Bun Mode  Test Mode       Clear Faults  Go To Faults          E Power Los Handler   amp  Tasks    a  MainTask   3 68 MainProgram                                               RSLogix 5000   User_doc    File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help    alsmi ai siete   e a ale  J aia eaa    al BEE a lea Koa a    gt    4   gt    user 
8.                Feature Default value Page of description  Communications format Output data  Program mode Off 6 11  Program to fault transition Disabled 6 11  Fault mode Off 6 11  Wiring example  Use the following example to wire your module   L1 0 ie  I    out o  NOTES  All terminals with the same name are 4 a  H   T 1  connected together on the module  sa i  HI oy  For example  L1 can be connected to Group 0 L1 0 i S i 7A     OUT 2  any terminal marked L1 0  i NU  L1 0   H I     OUT 3  When you daisy chain from a group to I Key  another RTB  always connect the daisy L1 0 IGS  HD    Not used Group 0  chain to the terminal directly connected  a i aN __  to the supply wire  as shown  L1 1 i  EP  OUT 4  1 1  This wiring example shows a single L1 1 i    ete OUT 5  voltage source  Group 1 16 5s     11 1     IED iE    our 6  rit tf  11 1    EB EB    out 7  20  11 1      IGS INEB    Notusea   Group 1    aa 5  Daisy chain to L1  other RTBs  40178 M  Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator  L1 0  5  gt  an   SE G gt  AC OUTPUT  La 8      E  yo   ny g ST012345670  ass OUT 0    KO          Control Bus Interface 2A Le 6       Display  0   43ms  41161 M Time 40852 M 20978 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Module Specific Information 7 29       1756 0A8 Specifications       Number of Outputs    8  4 points common        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    200mA   5 1V dc  amp  2mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 1 07W           
9.                New Module               Cut  Copy  Paste  1 Select the module  Delete  2 Click on the right mouse  button to display the menu         Edit the properties for the select_  3 Select Properties _Edit the properties for the select       You will see this screen        E Module Properties   Local 1  1756 0A8 1 1     Click on the tab of the General   Connection   Module Info  Configuration   Backplane    page you want to view Type  1756 048 8 Point 74 V 265   AC Output    7 Vendor  Allen Bradley  or reconfigure ae sae    Description        Comm Format   Output Data z   Revision  E fi   Electronic Keying   Disable Keying 7        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    6 16 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules       Reconfiguring Module  Parameters in Remote  Run Mode    1  Make the necessary  configuration changes     In Remote Run Mode   you can change the  Fault Mode setting or the  state of the outputs  when a communications  failure occurs in  Program Mode     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    When the controller is in Remote Run Mode  you can change configurable  features that are enabled by the software  If any feature is disabled  greyed  out  in Remote Run Mode  change the controller to Program Mode and  make the necessary changes     For example  the following screen shows the configuration page for the  1756 OA8 module while it is in Remote Run Mode        E Module Properties   Local 1  1756 0A8 1 1  x     General   Connection   Module Info 
10.           Status  Running Cancel      2  Click here to download Click here to download  the new data and close the new data and keep  the screen the screen open    Before the RPI rate is updated online  RSLogix 5000 will verify your  desired change     RSLogix 5000 Ea       Changing the Requested Packet Interval  RPI  while online will temporarily disable this connection  Change the     ie Requested Packet Interval   No   Cancel   Heb         Click here to continue  with the RPI change    The RPI has been changed and the new configuration data has been  downloaded to the controller     After making changes to your module   s configuration in Program Mode  it  is recommended that you change the module back to Run Mode     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    6 18 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules       Configuring 1 0 Modules ina  Remote Chassis    1 Select 1 0 Configuration   2 Click on the right mouse    button to display the menu     3 Select New Module    i For more information         Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    ControlLogix ControlNet Interface modules  1756 CNB or 1756 CNBR   are required to communicate with I O modules in a remote chassis     You must configure the communications module in the local chassis and the  remote chassis before adding new I O modules to the program     1  Configure a communications module for the local chassis  This module  handles communications between the controller chassis and the remote  chassis         RSLogix
11.         0 00 00 0 eee 4    Determining Diagnostic Input Module Compatibility           4    Determining Diagnostic Output Module Compatibility          4 2  Using Features Common to ControlLogix Diagnostic  Digital I O Modules  2   icaioe tthe cie eee pen hhe deed ates 4 3  Removal and Insertion Under Power  RIUP               4 3  Module Fault Reporting 4 6  4 06 2 ese ese annaa 4 3  Fully Software Configurable                     2005  4 3  Electronic Keying   6 3 ct cite arnt a Sa wad wed Eee 4 4  Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs  and Schedule Outputs    60    G eds    is ieee esse daa    4 5  Producer Consumer Model        hod eendsavas saa be des 4 7  LED Status Information                     000000008  4 7  Full Class I Division 2 Compliance                  04  4 8  CE CSA UL FM Agency Approvals                 04  4 8  Diagnostic Latch of Information                        4 8  Diagnostic Timestamp   lt   326 5 Gee 54a Geen kG    Qe deee es 4 8  8 Point AC 16 Point DC           0    eee eee eee 4 9  Point Level Fault Reporting                       005  4 9    Installing the ControlLogix  1 0 Module    Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules         4 1   Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time    4 11    Software Configurable Filter Times                    4 1   Isolated and Non Isolated Varieties of Modules           4 11  Multiple Point Densities               0    000200008  4 12  Open Wire Detection   2 02241  ced sehen sen 
12.        gt  MainProgram   MainRoutine Bife x     Message    MSG  re  Message Control W T     a    ut Instruction Ctrlex  Copy Instruction Ctrl C  Paste CtrlAy             Delete Instruction Del  Add Ladder Element    Ins  Edit Instruction Enter  Edit Tag Description       Toggle Bit Ctl T        Find Ctl F       GoTo    Ctr G       Create Tag        2 Click here to Create a Tag     Name the tag here     Choose the Base Tag Type here     Choose the Controller Scope here     IMPORTANT  Message tags can only  be created with the Controller Scope     Hame  Slot4_Ch0_Reset_Fuse    Enter an optional description here  E E phor    Cancel    P  Help             Tar type Po Base C Alas Consumed    Choose the Message Data Type here  Bata Type  gt   MESSAGE ey Configure               sv    MainRoutine         You must fill in the following information when the New Tag pop up    screen appears     Important  We suggest you name the tag to indicate what module service is    sent by the message instruction  For example  the message  instruction below is used to reset an electronic fuse  and the tag  is named to reflect this            User_manual controller  iv    Style    v      J    Produce this tag for up to B St consumers       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    B 4 Using Ladder Logic       Enter Message Configuration    After creating a new tag  you must enter message configuration        a  MainProgram   MainRoutine      of x           Type   Unconfigured       Click here to see the
13.       Allen Bradley    ControlLogix User Manual  Digital 1 0 Modules     Cat  No  1756 Series           Important User Information    Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication   those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must  satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that  each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements   including any applicable laws  regulations  codes and standards     The illustrations  charts  sample programs and layout examples shown in  this guide are intended solely for purposes of example  Since there are many  variables and requirements associated with any particular installation   Allen Bradley does not assume responsibility or liability  to include  intellectual property liability  for actual use based upon the examples shown  in this publication     Allen Bradley publication SGI 1 1  Safety Guidelines for the Application   Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control  available from your  local Allen Bradley office   describes some important differences between  solid state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken  into consideration when applying products such as those described in this  publication     Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication  in whole or  part  without written permission of Rockwell Automation  is prohibited     Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware 
14.       E    Local 8   Data 2  JE       Type   CIP Generic  Message Control    MSG    Slot4_B1_fuse_reset             Type   CIP Generic    Message Control    MSG    Pulse_test_slot4_bO g          o       Local 8   Data 3  JE    Move  Source    Dest  2 0000_0000_0000_0000_     Pulse_test_slotd_bO EXERR    0e  Pluse_Results_Slot4 0        nS                   Type   CIP Generic  Message Control       0000_0000_0000_0000         MSG    No  Latched_reset N  tse  SDN              End  zi  S12   MainRoutine   KE      gt                 Click on the box in each rung to see the configuration  and communication information pop up associated  with it  Examples of these pop ups can be found on  the following pages       The following screen shows examples of the tags used in the ladder logic as  they appear in the tag editor                                                                                                                      Controller Tags   Pulse_Fuse_example controller       x   Scope   Pulse_Fuse_exampl z  Show   Show All x  Sot   Tag Name 7   P   Tag Name  amp    Alias For Base Tag Type Style Description   P   E Slots Bt fuse reset   MESSAGE      Slot4_BO_fuse_reset MESSAGE      lteset_stt4_bt a E g DINT Binary     i  E reset_st4_b0 DINT Decimal      Pulse_test_slot4_bO MESSAGE  E C  H pulse_slt4_b0 DINT 5  Binary       pulse_results_slta DINT 1  Decimal  E C   Pluse_Results_Slot4 DINT 1  Binary  F Local 9 1 4B 1756_DI_DC_        Local 9 C 4B 1756_DI_DC_     F  Local 
15.       Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  5 1W   60  C  Thermal Dissipation 17 39 BTU hr  Output Voltage Range 74 265V ac  47 63Hz  Output Current Rating  Per Point 2A maximum   60  C  Linear derating   Per Module 5A maximum   30  C  amp  4A maximum   60  C  Linear derating        Surge Current per Point    20A for 43ms each  repeatable every 2s   60  C                      Minimum Load Current 10mA per point  Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 5V peak   2A  amp  6V peak   current lt 50mA  Maximum Off State Leakage Current 3mA per point  Commutating Voltage 4V us for loads gt 50mA  0 2V us for loads lt 50mA    Output Delay Time   Off to on 9 3ms   60Hz  11ms   50Hz   On to off 9 3ms   60Hz  11ms   50Hz  Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum  reference to the Coordinated    System Time       Configurable Fault States per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Configurable States in Program Mode per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Maximum Inhibit Voltage    Zero crossing 60V peak                                  Fusing Not protected   Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs  See  publication 1492 2 12   Isolation Voltage  Group to group 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   265V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  NEMA  7 9 inch pounds  0 8   1Nm   RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying
16.       Program mode Off 6 11  Program to fault transition Disabled 6 11  Fault mode Off 6 11                 Wiring example    Use the following example       to wire your module                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               2 Em     _Notused     UES IEB  12 0     J  IIS  L1 0 i  D OUT 0  L1 0 ie ie OUT 1  NOTES  All terminals with the same 8    name are connected together on L1 0 ie  ie OUT 2  the module  For example  L1 can it    be connected to any terminal L1 0 ie  IEB OUT 3  marked L1 0     ur    IEE ours  When you daisy chain from a F   if Vai  group to another RTB  always sles L1 1 I U OUT 5  connect the daisy chain to the RTBs i D ID   ours  terminal directly connected to L1 1 ak ND 5  the supply wire  as shown  I WT  we Group 1 ut     HEB HES  our 7  0 9  This wiring example shows a L1  ie  ia  12 1  single voltage source  es  as  L2  Daisy chain  to other  RTBs  40183 M  Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator  Diagnostic Control Block with   amp  Transformer Isolation L1 20A Surge en AC OUTPUT  ControlBus VAC fis  gt   Interface Y   1h   8  Short  GATE ae _ ST01234567 0    Verify  Lis a aan z FUSE012 34567 K  No Load 4 G  S  L2 1A   6  Display Loss of Field Power    EL
17.      COS multicast      RPI multicast    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    250    When a module resides in the same chassis as the owner controller  the  following two configuration parameters will affect how and when an input  module multicasts data     e Requested Packet Interval  RPI   e Change of State  COS     Requested Packet Interval  RPI     This interval specifies the rate at which a module multicasts its data  The  time ranges from 200 microseconds to 750 milliseconds and is sent to the  module with all other configuration parameters  When the specified time  frame elapses  the module will multicast data  This is also called a cyclic  update     Change of State  COS     This parameter instructs the module to transfer data whenever a specified  input point transitions from ON to OFF or OFF to ON     Important  The module COS feature defaults to both ON to OFF and OFF  to ON enabled     COS selection occurs on a per point basis  but all module data is multicast  when any point enabled for COS changes state  COS is more efficient than  RPI because it multicasts data only when a change occurs     Important  You must specify an RPI regardless of whether you enable  COS  If a change does not occur within the RPI timeframe  the  module will still multicast data at the rate specified by the RPI     For example  if an input is changing state consistently every 2 seconds and  the RPI is set at 750mS  the data transfer will look like this     1250 1500 1750 2250 2500 2750 
18.      Local 1 C FilterOffOn_16_23    Decimal    SINT         Local 1 C FilterOnOff_16_23    Decimal    SINT       t Local 1 C FilterOffOn_24_31    Decimal    SINT         Local 1 C FilterOnOff_24_31    o  ojojo  je e oje r       Decimal    SINT       HLocal 1 C C0S0n0ffEn    2 0000_0000_0    Binary    DINT        1 C COS0fOnEn    2 0000_0000_0    Binary    DINT       E Locat 1                  AB 1756_DI_Timest       j Local 1 1 Fault    2 0000_0000_0    Binary    DINT               Local 1 1 Data    2 0000_0000_0    Binary    DINT       i 1 Local 1  1 CSTTimestamp     eee         Decimal    DINT 2         1 ocal 1   COSStatus    2  0000_0000_0       Binary       DINT                     Monitor Tags    Edit Tags 7       r          Using Software Configuration Tags A 15       1756 O0A8D   The set of tags associated with a 1756 OA8D module that was configured  using Full Diagnostics Output Data for its Communications Format is  shown below     The configurable features for this configuration are as follows     Fault Mode and Value      Controller Tags   Sample controller      OF x   Scope   Sample controller  7  Filter   Show All z  Sort   Tag Name 7   Style  tide  4B 1756_D0 0 0    E Local 5 C Maak 4B 1756_DO_AC_D    HLocal 5 C ProgT oF aultEn 0   Decimal BOOL  Fault mode and value Ho LLocat 5 C FaultMode 2 0000_0000_0  Binary DINT  E j Local 5 C  Fault alue 2 0000_0000_0  Binary DINT  Program mode and value     HLocat 5 C ProgMode 2 0000_0000_0  Binary DINT          HocalS C 
19.      Maximum Inhibit Voltage    Zero crossing 60V peak       Fusing    Mechanically fused group  3 15A   250V ac slow blow  1500A interruption current  Littelfuse p n H2153 15       Isolation Voltage  Group to group    User to system    100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   265V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups   100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s       Module Keying  Backplane     Software configurable       RTB Screw Torque  NEMA     7 9 inch pounds  0 8 1Nm        RTB Keying    User defined mechanical keying       RTB and Housing    20 Position RTB  1756 TBNH or TBSH 2       Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature  Storage Temperature    0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F    40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F              Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded 2  3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 43 4  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch  8mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous     lt fm gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous       APPROVED    marked for all applicable directives       Commutating dv dt of output voltage  OUTPUT to L2  should not exceed 0 2V us for loads under 50mA  Commutating dv dt rating of module for loads    50 500mA  OUTPUT TO L2  is 4V us maximum  If commutating dv dt rating of TRIAC is exceeded  TRIAC could latch on  If commutating dv dt rating  is exceeded in 10 50mA range  a resistor may be added across the output and L2 
20.      Used in conjunction with FaultMode to configure the state of   1 bit per point  outputs when a communications fault occurs  See FaultMode   0 0FF  1 0N  FieldPwrLossEn Configuration Field Power Loss     Enables Field Power Loss diagnostic    1 bit per point  O disable  1 enable  NoLoadEn Configuration No Load     Enables No Load diagnostic      1 bit per point     O disable  1 enable       OutputVerifyEn   1 bit per point     Configuration Output Verify     Enables Output Verify diagnostic   O disable  1 enable       ProgMode   1 bit per point     Configuration Program Mode     Used in conjunction with ProgValue to configure the state  of outputs when the controller is in Program Mode  See ProgValue   0 Use ProgValue  OFF or ON   1 Hold Last State          ProgValue Configuration Program Value     Used in conjunction with ProgMode to configure the state   1 bit per point  of outputs when the controller is in Program Mode  See ProgMode    0 Off  1 On  ProgToFaultEn Configuration Program to Fault Transition     Diagnostic enables the transitioning of     1 byte per module        outputs to FaultMode if a communications failure occurs in Program Mode   Otherwise outputs will remain in ProgramMode  See ProgMode  ProgValue   FaultMode  FaultValue    O outputs stay in ProgramMode if comm failure   1 outputs got to FaultMode if comm failure          Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Using Software Configuration Tags A 9                               Input Data Tags  Table A
21.     1 bit per point           from the input point  If a group of points all show this fault  then possibly  the return  L1 or GND  is missing from the module  Also see FieldPwrLoss   O no fault  1 fault       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    A 8       Using Software Configuration Tags    Diagnostic Output Module Tags    The following tables list and define all tags that may be used for  ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules  Output modules have  three types of tags  configuration  input data  and output data     Important  The table below lists all possible diagnostic output module tags   In each application  though  the series of tags varies  depending    on how the module is configured     Configuration Tags          Table A H  Diagnostic Output Module Configuration Tags  Name  as listed in Configuration Definition   the Tag Editor   or 1 0 Data   FaultLatchEn Configuration Fault is Latched     If enabled for a point  any NoLoad  OutputVerifyFault or     1 bit per point     FieldPwrLoss will stay latched in the faulted state even if the fault no longer  exists until the User clears the fault  This does not affect FuseBlown  it is  always latched    O disable  1 enable latching       FaultMode   1 bit per point     Configuration Fault Mode     Used in conjunction with FaultValue to configure the state of  outputs when a communications fault occurs  See FaultValue   0 Use FaultValue  OFF or ON   1 Hold Last State             FaultValue Configuration Fault Value
22.     Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario    In the Worst Case scenario  the owner controller sends the output data just  after the    reserved    network slot has passed  In this case  the output module  will not receive data until the next available network slot     The following table shows the Best Case and Worst Case times for output  data sent from a controller to reach the output module     Table 2 C  Best and Worst Case Times for Remote Output Data Transfer    Best case time Worst case time  Backplane Network RPI rate  transfer times   lt 1mS        Important  These Best and Worst Case scenarios indicate the time required  for output data to transfer from the owner controller to the  module once the owner controller has produced it  They do  not take into account the user program time in the  owner controller     The receipt of new data is a function of the length of the user  program and its asynchronous relationship with the RPI     Any controller in the system can listen to the data from any I O module   e g  input data     echoed    output data  or    echoed    diagnostic information   even if the controller does not own the module  i e  it does not have to hold  the module   s configuration data to listen to the module      During the I O configuration process  you can specify one of several     Listen    modes in the Communication Format field  For more information  on Communication Format  see pagd 6 6      Choosing a    Listen    mode option allows the controller 
23.    1756 0B16D   Configurable features   The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                                Feature Default value Page of description   Diagnostic latch Enabled 4 8   No load detection Enabled   Field side output verification Enabled   Pulse test Performed at user   s request 4 17  Communications format Full diagnostics   output data  Program mode Off  Program to fault transition Disabled   Fault mode Off 6 11             Wiring example  Use the following example to wire your module                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Daisy chain to other RTBs  y  Dc 0   o2 1     ouT 0     DC 0  Hg j4 35 OUT 1   DC 0  Faye 5 OUT 2  NOTES  All terminals with the same name are SUE  ley 7 out a  connected together on the module   DC 0  E jp 8 OUT 4  For example  DC COM canbe connected   Group 0  DC 0 hd 11 OUT 5 Group 0  to either terminal marked GND 1   DC 0  ol    sE OUT 6       GND 0  hate 15 OUT 7  When you daisy chain from a group to    DC 1 p8 17 OUT 8    another RTB  always connect the daisy  DC 1  a2 19 OUT 9  chain to the terminal directly connected  DC 1  o2 217    OUT 10  to the supply wire  as show
24.    240 V ac   PF cos 0 0 4   Maximum Off State 1 5mA per point Fusing Not protected   Fused IFM is recommended to   Leakage Current protect outputs  See publication 1492 2 12    Output Delay Time Isolation Voltage   Off to On 10ms maximum Channel to channel 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  On to Off 10ms maximum  265V ac maximum continuous voltage    between channels                    User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Configurable Fault States   Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum   Per Point default  reference to the CST  Configurable States in Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the RTB Screw Torque 4 4 inch pounds  0 4Nm  maximum  Program Mode per Point    default   Cage clamp   Module Keying Software configurable Screwdriver Blade Width   1 8 inch  3 2mm  maximum   Backplane  for RTB  RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Conductors   Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded     3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum   Category 423   RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB  1756 TBCH or TBS6H   Agency Certification        when product or  packaging is marked        S Class   Div 2 Hazardous      lt  gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous       appROVED           marked for all applicable directives       ons    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 
25.    41381    Digital I O Operation Within the ControlLogix System 2 5       Input Modules in    a Remote Chassis      FS   Tw    Owner controller    ControlNet Bridge module     gt     Because the RPI and COS functions are asynchronous to the program scan   it is possible for an input to change state during program scan execution   The point must be    buffered    to prevent this  Copy the input data from your  input tags to another structure and use the data from there     To minimize traffic and conserve bandwidth  we recommend you use a  larger RPI value if the COS option is used and the module is located in the  same chassis as its owner     If an input module physically resides in a chassis other than where the  owner controller is  i e  a remote chassis connected via ControlNet   the role  of the RPI and the module   s COS behavior changes slightly with respect to  getting data to the owner     The RPI and COS behavior still define when the module will multicast data  within its own chassis  as described in the previous section   but only the  value of the RPI determines when the owner controller will receive it over  the network     When an RPI value is specified for an input module in a remote chassis  in  addition to instructing the module to multicast data within its own chassis   the RPI also    reserves    a spot in the stream of data flowing across the  ControlNet network     The timing of this    reserved    spot may or may not coincide with the exact  value of t
26.    Choosing a rack connection is only available to digital I O modules  Analog  modules can only use direct connections  but the system can perform both  direct and rack connections to the same chassis     For more information on ControlLogix analog modules  see the  ControlLogix Analog I O Modules user manual  publication 1756 6 5 9     Suggestions for Rack Connection Usage    In general  we recommend that you use a rack connection for applications in  which     e standard digital I O modules are used  e nonfused digital output modules are used  e your owner controller is running low on connections    Important  Do not use a rack connection for diagnostic I O modules or  fused output modules  Diagnostic and fused output data will not  be transferred over a rack connection  This defeats the purpose  of using those modules     Also remember  while a Logix5550 controller allows up to 250  bidirectional connections  each individual I O module allows  16 bidirectional connections     In this chapter you learned about     ownership and connections  direct connections   rack connections   input module operation  output module operation    Move to Chapter 3 to learn about ControlLogix Standard I O  Module Features     What This Chapter Contains    Determining Input  Module Compatibility    Chapter 3    ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0  Module Features    This chapter describes devices compatible with ControlLogix I O and  features that are specific to various modules  The following
27.    PROVED    C     marked for all applicable directives       Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual     Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations   FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     kwon       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 4 Module Specific Information       NOTES  All terminals with the same  name are connected together  onthe module  For example  L2  can be connected to any  terminal marked L2 15     When you use the second  L2 15 terminal to daisy chain to  other RTBs  always connect the  daisy chain to the terminal  directly connected to the supply  wire  as shown     The jumper bar part number is  97739201  Contact your local  Rockwell Automation sales  representative to order  additional jumper bars  if  necessary     1756 IA16l    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                 Feature Default value Page of description  Standard change of state OFF ON  Enabled 2 4  ON OFF  Enabled  Input filter time OFF ON  1ms 3 8  ON OFF  9ms  Communications format Input data             Wiring example    Use the followin
28.    The Blown Fuse diagnostic  see pagd 4 15 for a complete explanation of  fusing  can only be used when an output module is in the ON state  But it  would useful to be made aware when operating conditions for a module  may cause a blown fuse     If you perform a pulse test on the module while the output is in the OFF  state  the output point is commanded to be ON briefly  as described  above  Although no diagnostic bits are set in the output data echo  the    pulse test will report a failure because conditions when the point is ON  indicate a blown fuse condition may occur  see pages 4 9 f 4 10   Important The Pulse Test does not guarantee a fuse will blow when the    output point turns on  It merely indicates this condition  is possible     e detect a No Load condition with an output ON  The No Load diagnostic  see page  4 15  or a complete explanation  can  only detect a fault  i e  set the No Load bit  when an output point is in the    OFF state  But you may find it useful to be made aware when operating  conditions for that point may reveal a potential No Load condition     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    4 18 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    If you perform a pulse test on an output point while it is in the ON state   the output point is commanded to be OFF briefly  as described on page  4 17   The pulse test will report a failure because conditions when the  point is OFF indicate the possible absence o
29.   2 1  ControlNet  Direct connections 2 3  Input modules in remote chassis  2 5  Network Update Time  NUT   P 3  Output modules in remote  chassis 2 8  Rack connection P 3  2 13  Rack optimization P 3  2 13  Coordinated System Time  CST   P 2  CSA Certification 1 1  3 8  4 8    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    D  Data Exchange  Producer consumer model 1 1   2 3  2 7  3 7  4 7  Data Transmissions  Adjusting the RPI 6 17  Choosing an input module  communications format 6 6  Choosing an output module  communications format 6 7  Change of state 2 4  3 8  4 11   4 13  Diagnostic change of state 4 13  Diagnostic output modules 4 20  RPI P 4  2 4  3 8  4 10  4 13  4 20  Using change of state on standard  input modules 6 12  Using timestamped inputs and  scheduled outputs B 9  Default Configuration 6 10  Diagnostic Change of State 4 13   4 20  Diagnostic Latching 3 13  4 8  Direct Connections P 2  2 3  Disable Keying  Electronic keying 3 4  4 4  Dynamic Reconfiguration 6 15    E  Electronic Keying P 3  3 4  4 4  6 9  Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 5   6 9  Compatible match P 2  3 4  4 4  Disable keying P 2  3 4  4 4  Exact match P 3  3 4  4 4  Electrostatic Discharge  Preventing 1 5  Exact Match  Electronic keying 3 4  4 4  Extended Depth Housing  Using 5 6  5 7    F  Fault and Status Reporting  Diagnostic input modules 4 20  Diagnostic output modules 4 22  Standard input modules 3 14  Standard output modules 3 15  Fault Reporting  Determining f
30.   Class   Div 2 Hazardous     appROVED    marked for all applicable directives       kwon    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 46       Module Specific Information    1756 008    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                    Feature Default value Page of description  Communications format Output data  Program mode Off 6 11  Program to fault transition Disabled 6 11  Fault mode Off 6 11             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     Daisy chain to      2  gt   DC 0    I I   oo       A     DC 0    ie  ie  OUT 1  NOTES  All terminals with the same DC 0     l i OQUT 2  name are con
31.   F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 43 4  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch  8mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous     lt fm gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous             marked for all applicable directives       The commutating dv dt of the output voltage  OUTPUT to L2  should not exceed 0 2V us for loads under 50mA  The commutating    dv dt rating of the module for loads 50 500mA  OUTPUT TO L2  is 4V us maximum  If the commutating dv dt rating of the TRIAC  is exceeded  the TRIAC could latch on  If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 10 50mA range  a resistor may be added  across the output and L2  The purpose of this resistor is to increase the total output current to 50mA  I V R   At 50mA and above   the module has a higher commutating dv dt rating  When adding a resistor for the output to L2  be sure it is rated for the power  that it will dissipate  P  V  2  R   If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 50 500mA range  the L1 AC waveform could  be at fault  Be sure the waveform is a good sinusoid  void if any anomalies such as distorted or flattened sections     a wn    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to p
32.   Help            One diagnostic  Reset Latched Diagnostics  is not used when writing    configuration but is typically accessed during online monitoring  For more  information on how to reset Latched Diagnostics  see page  6 20     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    6 14 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules       Configuring a Diagnostic    Output Module modules  1756 OA8D and OB16D     The following ControlLogix digital output modules are diagnostic output    The configurable features for a diagnostic output module are     Output State in Program Mode  Output State in Fault Mode  Transition from Program State to Fault State  Field Power Loss Detection   1756 OA8D  amp  1756 OA8E only  No Load Detection  Diagnostic Latching  Output Verify Detection    Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on page 6 4  Use the  following pages to configure your diagnostic output module                                         Point Output State During Enable Diagnostics for Enable Diag   Program Mode  Fault Mode   Output Verity No Load Field Power Loss  Latching  Set the Program Mode value here ff xlor x M A y  rw Enable Field Power  mo Bor g K m M Vv Loss here  Set the Fault Mode value here alot leit   M d M K  3 lott ort zl A Vv vy Vv  Enable Output Verify here 4 fos jon    v id M  5 lott lor x A Vv Mv Vv  Enable No Load here ston E A pe l    A M M        Enable Diagnostic  7  off x  ott E  Vv Vv Vv Vv                         Communications Failure    If ications f
33.   July 1999    Using Software Configuration Tags                Input Data Tags  Table A B  Standard Input Module Input Data Tags  Name  as listed in Configuration Definition   the Tag Editor   or 1 0 Data   CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp     Timestamp can be configured to   8 bytes  indicate the time that data changed  see COSOffOnEn  COSOnOffEn   COSStatus  DiagCOSDisable  and or the time that a diagnostic fault  occurred  see OpenWireEn  FieldPwrLossEn    Data Input data Off On status for the input point    1 bit per point  0 Off  1 0n  Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a point is faulted and     1 bit per point        input data for that point may be incorrect  Check other diagnostic faults  if  they are available  for further diagnosis of the root cause  If communication  to the input module is lost  then all points for the module will be faulted   O no fault  1 fault  OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss or Comm Fault           Standard Output Module Tags    The following tables list and define all tags that may be used for  ControlLogix standard digital output modules  Output modules have three  types of tags  configuration  input data  and output data     Important  The table below lists all possible standard output module tags   In each application  though  the series of tags varies  depending    on how the module is configured     Configuration Tags          Table A C  Standard Output Module Configuration Tags  
34.   Keying the Removable Key the RTB to prevent inadvertently connecting the incorrect RTB to  Terminal Block your module     When the RTB mounts onto the module  keying positions will match up   For example  if you place a U shaped keying band in position  4 on the   module  you cannot place a wedge shaped tab in  4 on the RTB or your  RTB will not mount on the module     We recommend that you use a unique keying pattern for each slot in  the chassis     1  Insert the U shaped band with the longer side near the terminals  Push  the band onto the module until it snaps into place   PO ro    os rT fe et ee wy  ra Cae eae Ay                  20850 M    2  Key the RTB in positions that correspond to unkeyed module positions   Insert the wedge shaped tab on the RTB with the rounded edge first   Push the tab onto the RTB until it stops     Important  When keying your RTB and module  you must begin with a  wedge shaped tab in position  6 or  7     Wedge shaped  Keying Tab       67 20851 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 5 3       Connecting Wiring    You can use an RTB or IFM to connect wiring to you module  If you are  using an RTB  follow the directions below to connect wires to the RTB  An  IFM has been prewired before you received it     If you are using an IFM to connect wiring to the module  skip this section  and move to page 5 8      Three Types of RTBs  each RTB comes with housing    e Cage clamp   Catalog number 1756 TBCH   1  
35.   Maximum Inhibit Voltage    Zero crossing 25V peak                                  Fusing Electronically fused per point  Isolation Voltage  Group to group 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  NEMA  7 9 inch pounds  0 8 1Nm   RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB  1756 TBNH or TBSH    Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 123  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch  8mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked             e    Class   Div 2 Hazardous     marked for all applicable directives       a UNa    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 34 Module Specific Information    
36.   Module Properties Dialog    Some configurable features are changed on a module wide basis and some  on a point by point basis     Important  Although you can change the value for any point in the tags  the  module   s configuration is not updated until you download the  information  see pagg A 13       o  RSLogix 5000   User_doc  File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help    alsje     ae ol  ____ allie  vie  lay                  Me hd i     Pull down this menu and    __   _    a Forces Disabled    click here to go offline     In the Data Monitor  1  Highlight the value here  2  Type a new value                       Upload As  Download    Program Mode is ne EDA faa ASA  gt    Bun Mode       Test Mode    doc   Controller Tags   User_doc controller   Clear Faults  Go To Faults z  sees ult Handler  E Power Loss Handler Tag Name Value    Once you are offline  you can make configuration changes     Module wide Configurable Features    For features  such as Program to Fault enable  that are configured on a  module wide basis  highlight the value and type in the new value  as shown          Controller Tags   Sample controller  olx     Scope   Samplelcontroler x  Filter   Show Al x  Sort   Tas Name x                                                                                                                         Local 4 1 ail  4B 1756_DO_DC_    Local 4 0 tetera  4B 1756_D0 0 0   Local  6 C final  4B 1756_DO_AC_D  SE    Decimal BOOL  L Locat 5 C FaultMode 2 0
37.   Output Fault States  Configuring in RSLogix 5000  3 9  4 13  Output Verification  Diagnostic output modules 4 17  Output Verify Word  Diagnostic output modules 4 22   4 23  Owner Controller  Logix5550 Controller P 1  2 1  Ownership 2 1  Direct connections 2 3  Listen only 2 10  Listen only rack optimization  2 13  Multiple owners of input modules  P 3  2 11  Owner controller P 3  Rack connection P 3  2 13  Rack optimization 2 13  2 14  Remote connection P 3  Remote connections for input  modules only 2 5  Remote connections for output  modules only 2 8    P  Producer Consumer  Communications 1 1  Network model 1 1  2 3  2 7  3 7   4 7    Product Identification  Catalog number 3 4  4 4  Major revision P 3  3 4  4 4  Minor revision P 3  3 4  4 4  Product type 3 4  4 4  Vendor 3 4  4 4  Product Support  Rockwell Automation support  P 5  Program Mode P 3  Pulse Test  Diagnostic output modules 4 17  Performing with ladder logic  B 12    R  Rack Connections P 3  2 13  2 14  Rack Optimization Connections P 3   2 13  2 14  6 6  6 8  Remote Chassis  Using input modules 2 5  Scenarios for data transfer 2 6  Using output modules 2 8  Scenarios for data transfer  2 10  Remote Connections P 3  Removable Terminal Block  RTB   P 3  1 2  1 3  5 2  Installing 5 8  Mechanically keying the RTB 5 2  Removing 5 9  Using with the housing 5 5  Wiring the RTB 5 3  Removal and Insertion Under Power   RIUP  P 3  1 1  1 5  3 3  4 3   5 1  Requested Packet Interval  RPI  P 4   2 4  3 8  4 10  4 13  4 
38.   RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB  1756 TBNH or TBSH    Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded    3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 43 4  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch  8mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous     lt fm gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous         3 marked for all applicable directives       Commutating dv dt of output voltage  OUTPUT to L2  should not exceed 0 2V us for loads under 50mA  Commutating dv dt rating of module for loads    50 500mA  OUTPUT TO L2  is 4V us maximum  If commutating dv dt rating of TRIAC is exceeded  TRIAC could latch on  If commutating dv dt rating  is exceeded in 10 50mA range  a resistor may be added across the output and L2  The purpose of this resistor is to increase total output current to  50mA  l V R   At 50mA and above  module has a higher commutating dv dt rating  When adding a resistor for the output to L2  be sure it is rated  for the power that it will dissipate  P  V  2  R   If commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 50 500mA range  L1 AC waveform could beat fault   Be sure waveform is a good sinusoid  void if any anomalies such as distorted or flattened sections     anon    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE    Use this conductor 
39.   Rockwell Automation sales Det  GND 15  ena aa N t s  d  representative to order additional e eee De   a a o DC     jumper bars  if necessary fo Stag     N Daisy chain to other RTBs a     Simplified schematic LED indicator  5V  IN 0     DC INPUT  T       GND 0     V K 8   gt  g  f   sroizaess7o    s A ST 89 10 11 1213 1415 K  GND                  ControlBus Display  Interface  30183 M 20945 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999          Module Specific Information    1756 1H16l Specifications    7 19          Number of Inputs    16  Individually isolated        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    125mA   5 1V dc  amp  3mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 0 71W              Maximum Power Dissipation 5W   60  C  Thermal Dissipation 17 05 BTU hr  On State Voltage Range 90 146V dc    Derated as follows    90 146V dc   50  C  12 Channels ON   same time  90 132V dc   55  C  14 Channels ON   same time  90 125V dc   60  C  16 Channels ON   same time  90 146V dc   30  C  16 Channels ON   same time                   Nominal Input Voltage 125V dc   On State Current 1mA   90V dc minimum  3mA   146V dc maximum   Maximum Off State Voltage 20V dc   Maximum Off State Current 0 8mA   Maximum Input Impedance   146V dc 48 67kQ       Input Delay Time       Off to on Programmable filter  Oms  1ms or 2ms  Hardware delay 2ms maximum plus filter time  On to off Programmable filter  Oms  1ms  2ms  9ms or 18ms  Hardware delay 6ms maximum plus filter time  Diagnos
40.   UNITED STATES       PLEASE REMOVE       Reach us now at www rockwellautomation com    Wherever you need us  Rockwell Automation brings together leading  brands in industrial automation including Allen Bradley controls    Reliance Electric power transmission products  Dodge mechanical power  transmission components  and Rockwell Software  Rockwell Automation s  unique  flexible approach to helping customers achieve a competitive  advantage is supported by thousands of authorized partners  distributors  and system integrators around the world        Americas Headquarters  1201 South Second Street  Milwaukee  WI 53204  USA  Tel   1  414 382 2000  Fax   1  414 382 4444 Rockwell  European Headquarters SA NV  avenue Herrmann Debroux  46  1160 Brussels  Belgium  Tel   32  2 663 06 00  Fax   32  2 663 06 40     Asia Pacific Headquarters  27 F Citicorp Centre  18 Whitfield Road  Causeway Bay  Hong Kong  Tel   852  2887 4788  Fax   852  2508 1846 Automation  Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999 PN 955135 65    Supersedes Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1998     1999  Rockwell International Corporation  Printed in the U S A     
41.   When you daisy chain from 0 T   a group to another RTB  DC 0    ie  qe    RTN OUT 0  always connect the daisy     tah    chain to the terminal OUT 9 lige h   E     OUT 8  directly connected to the OUT 11       i aa OUT 10  supply wire  as shown  al Mi  E A our 13     IEO E  our 12 eee  This wiring example shows 75 is  a single voltage source  OUT 15 i ie OUT 14  DC 1    ie  ie  RTN OUT 1    Cc    Daisy chain to Daisy chainto  other RTBs other RTBs                       40174 M  DC COM  Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator  Display Optoisolation DC 0    z  t      3     gt  DC OUTPUT  oO  y SEN Surge  ri    i   ks aA Continuous See Sat 8    Sh No   60  C FUSE U 7 a  4 I OUT 0 1A          lt  lt  lt  ST 8 9 10 11 1213 1415  i   FUSE E  O 4  ControlBus Electronic RTN a Time 10ms ELECTRONICALLY FUSED  Interface Fuse Circuitry mngm OUT 0 40851 M 40464 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Module Specific Information 7 37       1756 0B16E Specifications       Number of Outputs    16  8 points common        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    250mA   5 1V dc  amp  2mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 1 32W                                      Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  4 1W   60  C  Thermal Dissipation 13 98 BTU hr  Output Voltage Range 10 31 2V dc  Output Current Rating  Per Point 1A maximum   60  C  Per Module 8A maximum   60  C  Surge Current per Point 2A for 10ms each  repeatable every 2s   60  C  Minimum Load C
42.   making it appear that  they changed at exactly the same time     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    4 6 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Timestamping In Conjunction with Scheduled Outputs   Timestamping can be used in conjunction with the full diagnostics   scheduled outputs feature so that after input data changes state and a   timestamp occurs  an output point will actuate at some configured time in   the future  You can schedule outputs up to 16 seconds into the future    When you use timestamping of inputs and scheduled outputs  you must    e choose a Communications Format for each diagnostic input and  diagnostic output module that allows timestamping  For more  information on choosing a Communications Format  see Chapter 5      e have a controller in the same rack as both I O modules    e disable Change of State for all input points on the input module except  the point being timestamped    For scheduled outputs to work most effectively  remember the following     e The time to schedule outputs to transition in the future must account for  any controller  backplane and network delays     e The I O modules must reside in the same rack as the timemaster     For a detailed example of how to write ladder logic to use these features  see  Appendix B     Module Major Revision Considerations with Timestamping    When using timestamping for inputs or diagnostic timestamping of I O  modules  remember the followi
43.  0   2 5  Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario                   04  2 6  Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario                 0   2 6  Output Module Operation              0 0 0    eee eee 2 7  Output Modules in a Local Chassis                    005  2 8  Output Modules in a Remote Chassis                   0   2 8  Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario                  0004  2 9  Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario                04  2 10  Listen Only Modes i hove ceed ve atenedu kop a Gy had aed 2 10  Multiple Owners of Input Modules                        2 11  Configuration Changes in an Input Module  with Multiple Owners    1 2 2    0 0    ee eee eee eee 2 12  Rack OMnNECHONSS   5 62 menneiey Mod oad eee Pew Ade has 2 13  Suggestions for Rack Connection Usage                 2 14  Chapter Summary and What   s Next                  04   2 14  Chapter 3  What This Chapter Contains             0 0 0 0    eee eee 3 1  Determining Input Module Compatibility                    3 1  Determining Output Module Compatibility                  3 2  Using Features Common to ControlLogix Standard  Digital VO  Modules    2  ee 46 eters eae es 48  ok oe ad att 3 3  Removal and Insertion Under Power  RIUP               3 3  Module Fault Reporting            0 0 0 0    eee eee 3 3  Fully Software Configurable                      008  3 3  Electronic Keying    s2sentydui Ged iebid oe eee tae os 3 4    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital  1 0 Module Features    Public
44.  0 Modules       Using the Default Configuration If you use the default configuration and click on Finish  you are done     Altering the Default  Configuration    If you want to alter or view the default configuration  click on Next  You  will will be taken through a series of wizard screens that enable you to alter  or view the module     Although each screen maintains importance during online monitoring  two  of the screens that appear during this initial module configuration process  are blank  They are shown here to maintain the graphical integrity of    RSLogix 5000  To see these screens in use  see page  8 4      After the naming page  this screen appears     Module Properties   Local 1  1756 0A8 1 1  x     Adjust the Requested Packet Interval here       Bequested PacketintersHBPiie  5 0  ms  0 1   750 0 ms     Inhibit the connection to the module here          sF Inhibit Module    If you want a Major Fault on the  Controller to occur if there is  connection failure with the 1 0    module  click here    This screen is used during online  monitoring but not initial configuration    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999                F Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails    Module Fault            This Fault box is empty when you  are Offline  If a fault occurs while  the module is online  the type of  fault will be displayed here               Cancel          lt  Back    Finish  gt  gt    Help      Click here to move to the next page           E New Module   Loca
45.  5    Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs    Controllers generate a 64 bit Coordinated System Time  CST  for their  respective chassis  The CST is a chassis specific time that is not  synchronized with  or in any way connected to  the time generated over  ControlNet to establish a NUT  as described in Chapte    You can configure your digital input modules to access the CST and full  diagnostic input data with a relative time reference  i e  the value of the  CST  of when that input data changes state     Important  Because only one CST value is returned to the controller when  any input point changes state  it is recommended that you use  timestamping on only one input point per module     Timestamping for a Sequence of Events    The CST can be used to establish a sequence of events occurring at a  particular input module point by timestamping the input data  To determine  a sequence of events  you must     e Set the input module   s communications format to  Full diagnostics  input data    e Enable Change of state for the input point where a sequence will occur   Disable COS for all other points on the module     If you decide to configure multiple input points for COS  your module  generates a unique CST each time any of those input points change state  as  long as the changes do not occur within 500uUS of each other     If multiple input points configured for COS change state within 500us of    each other  a single CST value is generated for all
46.  5000   User_doc  File Edit View Si fi Wir    File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help  let  ar a ale te     i miae pelos en ls oe    gt       lt   gt   user KBR A_Timericounter K pop A                                 E  Controller User_doc  Controller Tags  E Controller Fault Handler  E Power Loss Handler   5 6 Tasks   3 8 MainTask   3 88 MainProgram   Program Tags    E  MainRoutine   Ea Unscheduled Programs   5 6 Data Types   Gi User Defined   Gi  Predefined                                                                                                                2  Choose a 1756 CNB or 1756 CNBR module and configure it     For more information on the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface modules   see the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Installation Instructions   publication 1756 5 32     Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 19       3  Configure a communications module for the remote chassis                    RSLogix 5000   User_doc  File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help    rece ELE ee    e             E           orces Disabled    Driver  AB_DF1 1    Abeta  HA    4  gt   user Abit K_TimeriCounter Input Output       E Controller User_doc  Controller Tags  E Controller Fault Handler    Power Loss Handler  Sj Tasks  5 8 MainT ask   2  MainProgram  A Program Tags   E  MainRoutine    3 Unscheduled Programs   5  Data Types   Ep User Defined  E Predefined     Module Defined  5 6 1 0 Configuration  H  1  1756 048 Swit
47.  60  C  Thermal Dissipation 11 25 BTU hr  On State Voltage Range 90 146V dc  Output Current Rating  Per Point 2A maximum   60  C  Per Module 8A maximum   60  C  Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each  repeatable every 1s   60  C  Minimum Load Current 2mA per point  Maximum On State Voltage Drop 2V dc   2A  Maximum Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point  Output Delay Time  Off to on 2ms maximum  On to off 2ms maximum  Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum  reference to the CST       Configurable Fault States per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Configurable States in Program Mode per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Fusing    Not protected   Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs  See    publication 1492 2 12        Reverse Polarity Protection    None   If module is wired incorrectly  outputs may be damaged        Isolation Voltage  Channel to channel    100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s     250V ac maximum continuous voltage between channels                    User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  Cage clamp  4 4 inch pounds  0 4Nm  maximum  RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB  1756 TBCH or TBS6H    Environmental Conditions   Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F    Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F    Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing       Conductors 
48.  C   For 1756 PA72 PB72  Series B and 1756 PA75 PB75  Series A                   Important  We recommend that you copy this worksheet for use in  checking the power supply of each ControlLogix chassis used     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Appendix D    Driving Motor Starters with ControlLogix  Digital 1 0 Modules    Use this appendix to choose a ControlLogix digital I O module to drive  Bulletin 500 Series motor starters in your application  The tables below list  the number of motor starters  5 sizes are listed for each module  that a    particular digital I O module can drive     Important  When using the tables  remember that the supply voltage for  each module must not drop below the minimum state motor  starter supply voltage                                                     Table D A  Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Motor Starters  120V ac 60Hz   Catalog Number   Size 0 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5  Motor Starter   Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter  1756 0A161 16 15   30  C 13   30  C 8  30  C 5 30C  12  60C 10   60  C 6  60C 4 60C  1756 0A16 16 14 4 None None   Only 7 per group     Only 2 per group   1756 0A8 8 8 8 8 30C 5 30C  6  60C 4 60C  1756 OA8D 8 8 8 None None  1756 OA8E 8 8 8 6 6 30C   Only 3 per group     Only 3 per group   4 60C   Only 2 per group   Table D B  Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Motor Starters  230V ac 60Hz   Catalog Number   Size 0 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5  Motor Starter   Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor 
49.  Change of State OFF to ON     Triggers an event in the controller for OFF to     1 bit per point     ON transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data  table as soon as possible  The CST timestamp is also updated   O disable  1 enable       DiagCOSDisable   per module        Configuration Diagnostic Change of State     Triggers the module to transmit diagnostic  status data with an updated timestamp as soon as the diagnostic data  changes state          Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Using Software Configuration Tags A 7                                                    Table A F  Diagnostic Input Module Configuration Tags  Name  as listed in Configuration Definition   the Tag Editor   or 1 0 Data   FaultLatchEn Configuration Fault is Latched     If enabled for a point  any OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss will   1 bit per point  stay latched in the faulted state even if the fault no longer exists until the  User clears the fault   O disable  1 enable latching  FieldPwrLossEn Configuration Field Power Loss     Enables Field Power Loss diagnostic    1 bit per point  O disable  1 enable  FilterOnOff_0_7 etc    Configuration Filter Times ON to OFF     Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules   1 byte per group  for ON to OFF transition  Operates on groups of 8 points   Valid DC filter times 0  1  2  9  18ms  Valid AC filter times 1  2ms  FilterOffOn_0_7 etc    Configuration Filter Times OFF to ON     Filter time for digital filter in dig
50.  Contact Resistance  30mQ     Total backplane power 4 37W        Maximum Power    4 5W   60  C    Switching Frequency    1 operation 3s  0 3Hz at rated load  maximum             Dissipation  Module    Thermal Dissipation 15 35 BTU hr Bounce Time 1 2ms  mean    Output Voltage Range 10 265V 47 63Hz 5 150V dc Expected Contact Life 300k cycles resistive 100k cycles inductive  Output Voltage Range 5 30V dc   2A resistive Power Rating  steady 250W maximum for 125V ac resistive output                    load dependent  48V dc   0 5A resistive state  480W maximum for 240V ac resistive output  125V dc   0 25A resistive 60W maximum for 30V dc resistive output  125V ac   2A resistive 24W maximum for 48V dc resistive output  240V ac   2A resistive 31W maximum for 125V dc resistive output   250VA maximum for 125V ac inductive output  480VA maximum for 240V ac inductive output  60VA maximum for 30V dc inductive output  24VA maximum for 48V dc inductive output  31VA maximum for 125V dc inductive output   Output Current Rating Resistive Environmental Conditions    at rating power  2A   5 30V dc Operating Temperature  0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   0 5A   48V dc Storage Temperature    40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   0 25V   125V dc Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  2A   125V ac  2A   240V ac  Inductive  2A steady state   5 30V dc  L R 7ms  0 5A steady state   48V dc  L R 7ms  0 25A steady state   125V dc  L R 7ms  2A steady state  15A make   125V ac    PF cos 0 0 4  2A steady state  15A make
51.  Decim        LastT imestamp 1  DINT  Decim     Local 0 C AB 1      Local 0 1 AB 17     Local 1 C AB 17      Local 1   ae   Local1 0 AB 17      Time_at_which_Input_Changed_O   Local 0 1 CSTTimestamp 0   Local 0 1 C DINT  Decim  C  Time_at_which_Input_Changed_1   Local 0 1 CSTTimestamp 1   Locak0 1 C DINT  Decim     Time_at_which_Output_Will Change  Local 1 0 CSTTimestamp 0  Local1 0  DINT  Decim  O ha i                         EIN Monitor Tags    Edit Tags BiS ay       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    B 12 Using Ladder Logic       Rungs 0 and 1 are used to  perform a reset fuse service  on Bits 0 and 1  respectively   of a 1756 OA8D module in  slot 4     Rung 2 performs a pulse test  service to slot 4        _   gt     Rung 3 moves the results of  the pulse test to a data  storage location   The actual  results appear in the  message instruction tags  under the tag name EXERR        _ gt     Rung 4 performs a reset  latched diagnostics service  to slot 4  This example shows  an output module     These tags were created        for this ladder logic     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Resetting a Fuse  Performing the Pulse Test  and Resetting Latched Diagnostics    The following ladder logic program shows how to reset the electronic fuse  of a faulted point and perform a pulse test through ladder logic             MainProgram   MainRoutine    Local 4 1  FuseBlown 0    Local 8   Data 1     Local4   FuseBlown 1  E  m       Type   CIP Generic  Message Control           
52.  E   1s IN 9  terminal directly connected to the GND 10     Qj 22 ae  N 10    o  o     supply wire  as shown  GND 11 a N 11  a     z E 5 T Sink  Each input can be wired in a sink or Non isolated e   aoe tae 2 2 Input  source configuration  as shown  wiring 7 9 28 27 On    Ba  GND 14     Gj 30 29 IN 14      o      wiring  The jumper bar part number is GND 15  l 32 31    IN 15   o o  97739201  Contact your local DC    o      GND 15  134 33 GD      Not used    DCU   Rockwell Automation sales    Notused  TG  ss 35 GD      Not used  representative to order additional  jumper bars  if necessary        Daisy chain to other RTBs 30245 M  Simplified schematic LED indicator  ay    DC INPUT  IN 0 f      f       GND 0    VK ST01234567 0  D q   5 P ST 89 10111213 1415 K a    4  GND           lt     ControlBus Display  Interface  30183 M 20945 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Module Specific Information 7 13       1756 IB16l Specifications                                                                               Number of Inputs 16  individually isolated   Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis  Backplane Current 100mA   5 1V dc  amp  3mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 0 45W   Maximum Power Dissipation 5W   60  C  Thermal Dissipation 17 05 BTU hr  On State Voltage Range 10 30V dc  Nominal Input Voltage 24V dc  On State Current 2mA   10V dc minimum  10mA   30 V dc maximum  Maximum Off State Voltage 5V dc  Maximum Off State Current 1 5mA  Maximum Input Impedance   30V dc 3
53.  I  Diagnostic Output Module Input Data Tags  Name  as listed in Configuration Definition   the Tag Editor   or 1 0 Data   CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp     Timestamp of diagnostic input   8 bytes  data including fusing  see BlownFuse  NoLoad  OutputVerifyFault   FieldPwrLoss   which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes  away   Data Input data Data     Off On status for the output point ECHOED back from the output   1 bit per point  module  This is used to verify proper communication only No field side  verification is done  For field side verification  see OutputVerifyFault   0 Off  1 0n  Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a point is faulted and   1 bit per point  1 0 data for that point may be incorrect  Check other diagnostic faults  if  they are available  for further diagnosis of the root cause  If communication  to the input module is lost  then all points for the module will be faulted   O no fault  1 fault  FuseBlown  NoLoad  OutputVerifyFault   FieldPwrLoss  or CommFault   FieldPwrLoss Input Data Field Power Loss     AC output diagnostic detects that field power has failed   1 bit per point  or is disconnected from the module  No Load will also be detected   O no fault  1 fault  FuseBlown  Input Data Fuse is Blown     An electronic or mechanical fuse has detected a short or   1 bit per point  overload condition for an output point  All FuseBlown conditions are latched  and must be res
54.  INS  connected together on the module  11 0 ie ie OUT 1  For example  L1 can be connected to I j   any terminal marked L1 0  L1 0    ie  OUT 2  When you daisy chain from a group to L1 0 Ie  ie  OUT 3  another RTB  always connect the daisy Cig mi  chain to the terminal directly connectec L1 1 ie  ee  OUT 4  to the supply wire  as shown  14 HE  5 Daisy chain u 1    EEDI  out s  This wiring example shows a single to other i i  voltage source  RTBs L1 1 ie ie OUT 6  18 kd  Group 1 us    IID  our 7  0 9  L1 1 i EI 12  CA  L2  Daisy chain  to other  RTBs  40185 M  Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator  Diagnostic Control Block with o  a  amp  Transformer Isolation u ga Rl hace   gt  AC OUTPUT  ControlBus VAC E 7  Interface i 7     A   sa   Surge   60  C 3  o E To p S Dan E  a O g 5   o    Verify   Hy our    144 pape Firo01234567      No Load ji 500mA L Continuous   60  C  L2 f n  5 0  Display Loss of Field Power    mine 43ms DIAGNOSTIC  41118 M 40848 M 20935 M                   Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Module Specific Information 7 31       1756 OA8D Specifications       Number of Outputs    8  4 points common        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    175mA   5 1V dc  amp  250mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 6 89W        Maximum Power Dissipation  Module     5 3W   60  C       Thermal Dissipation    18 BTU hr          Output Voltage Range 74 132V ac  47 63Hz   Output Current Rating  Per Point 1A maximum   30  C 
55.  INT             WHO product_type       7    Decimal    INT        WHO product_code       2       FWO  majorevisio    m2       Decimal  Decimal    INT  SINT           WHO minor_revision       5    Decimal    SINT           WHO  status           WHO serial_number          2 0000_0000_C     16 cO00_Obat    Binary  Hex    INT  DINT             WHDO string_length    32    Decimal    SINT            WHO ascii_string    i           WHO_Information    Hex  Hex     SINTER  SINT 48                     who_msg       ay  eer  eee                 MESSAGE         Monitor Tags A Edt Tags   Tags 4              Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    B 14 Using Ladder Logic       Rung 0 constantly polls the module for    WHO status  To conserve bandwidth  only              poll for status when necessary     Rung 1 extracts the product type  and catalog code     Rung 2 extracts the module   s major  and minor revisions     Rung 3 extracts the module   s  status information     Rung 4 extracts the vendor ID and  serial number     Rung 5 extracts the module   s ASCII  text string and the length of the text  string in bytes     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999        You do not have to create the user defined data structure  If you  choose not to create this structure  you can use the Ascii string  and String length to retrieve and understand module  identification through some interface excluding RSLogix 5000  software     The screen below shows the example WHO ladder logic application         
56.  Modules  and Controllers    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules multicast fault status data to  any owner  listening controllers     All diagnostic input modules maintain a Module Fault Word  the highest  level of fault reporting  Some modules also use additional words to indicate  fault conditions  as shown on the next page     The following tags can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault  has occurred     e Module Fault Word   This word provides fault summary reporting  It   s  tag name is Fault  This word is available on all digital input modules     e Field Power Loss Word   This word indicates loss of field power to a  group on the module  It   s tag name is FieldPwrLoss  This word is only  available on 1756 IA8D     For more information on field power loss  see page    e Open Wire Word   This word indicates the loss of a wire from a point  on the module  It   s tag name is OpenWire     For more information on open wire  see page  4 12      All words are 32 bit  although only the number of bits appropriate for each  module   s density are used  For example  the 1756 IA16I module has a  Module Fault Word of 32 bits  But  because this is a 16 point module  only  the first 16 bits  bits 0 15  are used in the Module Fault Word     Fault bits in the Field Power Loss Word and Open Wire Word are logically  ORed into the Module Fault Word  In other words  depending on the  module type  a bit set in the Module Fault W
57.  State Leakage Current 1mA per point  Output Delay Time  OFF to ON 1ms maximum  ON to OFF 5ms maximum  Diagnostic Functions   Short trip 8A 180ms minimum  10A 120ms minimum  No load OFF STATE detection only  Output verification ON STATE detection only  Pulse test On and Off state detection  Time stamp of diagnostics     1ms  Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum  reference to the CST       Configurable Fault States per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Configurable States in Program Mode per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Fusing    Electronically fused per point       Reverse Polarity Protection    None   If module is wired incorrectly  outputs may be damaged                                Isolation Voltage  Group to group 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  Cage clamp  4 4 inch pounds  0 4Nm  maximum  RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB  1756 TBCH or TBS6H    Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded 1  3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 123  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch  3 2mm  maximum  Agency Certificati
58.  The purpose of resistor is to increase total ou tput current to  50mA  l V R   At 50mA and above  module has a higher commutating dv dt rating  When adding a resistor for the output to L2  be sure it is rated for  the power that it will dissipate  P  V  2  R   If commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in 50 500mA range  L1 AC waveform could be at fault  Be sure  waveform is a good sinusoid  void if any anomalies such as distorted or flattened sections     anon    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE    Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines      CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 26       N    Module Specific Information    OTES  All terminals with the same name  are connected together on the  module    For example  L1 can be connect   ed to either terminal marked  L1 15     When you use the second L1 15  terminal to daisy chain to other  RTBs  always connect the daisy  chain to the terminal directly  connected to the supply wire   as shown     The jumper bar part number is  97739201  Contact your local  Rockwell Automation sales  representative to order additional  jumper bars  if necessary     Simplified sc
59.  User_doc controller   Clear Faults    Go To Faults             E Power Loss Handler  E Tasks  Local 1 C  a  MainTask FLocat1 C ProatoFaultEn                                                     RSLogix 5000 verifies the download process with this pop up screen     Download x   jA Download to the controller    amp  Name  Userdoc    Type  1756 L1 4 1756 M0 0 LOGIX5550  Using this communications configuration     Driver  AB_DF1 1  Path           Cancel       This completes the download process     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    A 14 Using Software Configuration Tags       Filter times for groups of points    Change of state  ON to OFF or OFF to ON    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Sample Series of Tags    1756 IA161    The set of tags associated with a 1756 IA16I module that was configured  using CST Timestamped Input Data for its Communications Format is    shown below     The configurable features for this configuration are as follows     e Filter Times  e Change of State    When you access the tags for this module as described on pag A 10  you  will see the following screen          Controller Tags   Sample controller     Scope   Sample controller  7  Filter   Show Al z  Sort   Tag Name z        AB 1756_DI C 0        1 C  DiagCOS Disable    Decimal    BOOL        1 C FilterOffOn_O_     Decimal    SINT       t Local1 C FilterOnOff_O_     Decimal    SINT         Local 1 C FilterOfOn_8_15    Decimal    SINT       t Local 1 C Filter OnOff_8_15    Decimal    SINT    
60.  after a     a communications fail in   Leave outputs in Program Mode state    Communications Failure here    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999       sort x M M     Enable   x E p p diagnostic  sort E  E   M latching here      M M    f   cad M   zl E  v M     zi v v                            Program Mode     Change outputs to Fault Mode state       Cancel    lt  Back   Next gt    Enis     Help         Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 13       Configuring a Diagnostic The following ControlLogix digital input modules are diagnostic input  Input Module modules  1756 IA8D and IBI6D     The configurable features for a diagnostic input module are     Input Change of State  Input Filter Times   Open Wire Detection   Field Power Loss Detection  Diagnostic Latching  Diagnostic Change of State    Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on pagd 6 4  Use the  following pages to configure your diagnostic input module        Module Properties   Local 4  1756 IB16D 2 1  Ea       Enable Change of State  Enable Diagnostics for  Enable  Diag   Latching      M    E  Ea   zam       _3    Ee  5   e    8      Enable Change of State here  Enable Open Wire here       f  Change filter  times here                 Enable Field Power Loss here             Enable Diagnostic Latching here       TATAIA  IAIA AARI  kalikali kaia             a       Enable Change of State for Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions    Diagnostic Transitions here   lt  Back   Next  gt  
61.  amp  0 5A maximum   60  C  Linear derating   Per Module 8A maximum   30  C  amp  4A maximum   60  C  Linear derating        Surge Current per Point    8A for 43ms each  repeatable every 2s   30  C  5A for 43ms each  repeatable every 1s   60  C                      Minimum Load Current 10mA per point  Maximum On State Voltage Drop 2 5V peak   0 5A  amp  3V peak   1A  Maximum Off State Leakage Current 3mA per point  Output Delay Time  Off to on 9 3ms   60Hz  11ms   50Hz  On to off 9 3ms   60Hz  11ms   50Hz  Diagnostic Functions  Short Trip 12A for 500s minimum  No Load Off state detection only  Output Verification On state detection only  Pulse Test On and Off state detection  Field Power Loss  Zero Cross  Detects at 25V peak minimum  Firmware phase locked loop   Time stamp of diagnostics     1ms  Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum  reference to the CST       Configurable Fault States per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Configurable States in Program Mode per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Maximum Inhibit Voltage    Zero crossing 25V peak                                  Fusing Electronically fused per point  Isolation Voltage  Group to group 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  NEMA  7 9 inch pounds  0 8 1Nm   RTB Keying User defined m
62.  by module and includes a list  of configurable functions  wiring diagrams  LED indicators  simplified  schematics and surge currents when applicable     The following table lists where module specific information can be found                                                                                         For module  Refer to   1756 IA16 7 2  1756 IA16l 7 4  1756 IA8D 7 6  1756 IB16 7 8   1756 IB16D 7 10  1756 IB16l 7 12  1756 IB32 7 14  1756 IC16 7 16  1756 IH16l 7 18  1756 IM16l 7 20  1756 IN16 7 22  1756 0A16 7 24  1756 0A16l 7 26  1756 0A8 7 28  1756 0A8D 7 30  1756 0A8E 7 32   1756 0B16D 7 34   1756 0B16E 7 36  1756 0B16l 7 38  1756 0B32 7 40  1756 0B8 7 42  1756 0B8EI 7 44  1756 0C8 7 46  1756 0H8I 7 48  1756 0N8 7 50   1756 0W16l 7 52  1756 0X8l 7 54          Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 2 Module Specific Information       1756 IA16    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                 Feature Default value Page of description  Standard change of state OFF ON  Enabled 2 4  ON OFF  Enabled  Input filter time OFF ON  1ms 3 8  ON OFF  9ms  Communications format Input data             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module          Group 0    NOTES  All terminals with the same name are  connected together on the module   For example  L2 can be connected to  any terminal marked L2 0     When you daisy chai
63.  change  Note that this  series of values is listed in  descending order of point number   Make sure you have highlighted the  point you want to change     2  Type in the valid new value     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    borate Progttatre    terose  0000_ Binay    DINT       HLocal 5 C FaultLatchEn    2 0000_0000_0  Binary    DINT         Local 5 C NoLoadEn    2 0000_0000_0  Binary    DINT          Local 5 C Output  erifyEn    2 0000_0000_0  Binary    DINT          Local 5 C FieldPwrLossEn    2 0000_0000_0  Binary    DINT                    Local 5      Gees    4B 1756_DO_AC_D          Local  1 Fault    2 0000_0000_0  Binary    DINT         Local  amp    DataEcho    2 0000_0000_0 Binary    DINT                   Decimal    DINT 2           F  Local 5 1 CST Timestamp    Monitor Tags       LI arak CST Limestamn       erimal    KI EA          NINT             Using Software Configuration Tags A 13       Downloading New  Configuration Data  From the Tag Editor    Pull down this menu and click       ___        here to download the new data    Click here to download new data    After you have changed the configuration data for a module  the change  does not actually take affect until you download the new information       o RSLogix 5000   User_doc  File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help    alsje  8   ele  ol  A wi  viel ala    v ey a  Forces Disabled o                Offline v               Go Online  Upload As                     a   Controller Tags  
64.  conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations   FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     wana       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 14 Module Specific Information       1756 IB32    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                 Feature Default value Page of description  Standard change of state OFF ON  Enabled 2 4  ON OFF  Enabled  Input filter time OFF ON  1ms 3 8  ON OFF  1ms  Communications format Input data             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   m IN 1 2 1 4 IN 0      IN 3   Jala 3 fe IN 20      ng  IN 5   Tis sf IN 4  IN 7 gl a IN 6  Group 0 IN 9  glo 9 E IN 8 Group 0  N 11  2 ni IN 10  NOTES  All terminals with the same IN 13 KoG 13  G IN 12  name are connected together IN 15  t6 15 g IN 14  on the module  For example  GND 0  Els 17K GND 0    DC COM can be connected to 
65.  given controller using RSLogix 5000  and download that information to the controller     2  If the I O configuration data references a module in a remote chassis  run  RSNetWorx     Important  RSNetWorx must be run whenever a new module is added to a  networked chassis  When a module is permanently removed  from a remote chassis  we recommend that Networx be run to  optimize the allocation of network bandwidth     Digital 1 0 Operation Within the ControlLogix System 2 3       Direct Connections    Input Module Operation    A direct connection is a real time data transfer link between the controller  and the device that occupies the slot that the configuration data references   When module configuration data is downloaded to an owner controller  the  controller attempts to establish a direct connection to each of the modules  referenced by the data     If a controller has configuration data referencing a slot in the control  system  the controller periodically checks for the presence of a device there   When a device   s presence is detected there  the controller automatically  sends the configuration data     If the data is appropriate to the module found in the slot  a connection is  made and operation begins  If the configuration data is not appropriate  the  data is rejected and an error message displays in the software  In this case   the configuration data can be inappropriate for any of a number of reasons   For example  a module   s configuration data may be appropria
66.  message  configuration pop up screens                      Enter message configuration on the following screens     e Configuration pop up screen  e Communications pop up screen    A description of the purpose and set up of each screen follows   Configuration Pop Up Screen   This pop up screen provides information on what module service to  perform and where to perform it  For example  you must use this screen to    reset an electronic fuse  module service  on channel 0 of a 1756 OA8D  module  where to perform service               Configuration      Communication    Message Type is CIP Generic                Messagetype      PfCiP Generic    Service Code is 4d             Servicefode      Pftd  Hex  Source   Slot4_ChO_Reset_Fuse     Object Type is 1e Object Type   le  Hex  Num  Of Elements   1     Bytes   Object ID is 1 Gbjecti     gt h Destination  Local 4 C x  Object Attribute is      Ghectittrite  gt      Her  Create Tag       left blank   Enable    Enable Waiting O Start Done Done Length  0      Error Code  I Timed Out          Extended Error Code     Cancel   Apply   Help         Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999                            Using Ladder Logic B 5  The following table contains information that must be entered on the  configuration pop up screen to perform I O module services   Table B A  Module Services and Configuration Pop Up Screen Information  Service  Description  Service   Object Type   Object ID Object Source Number of   Destination  Modules   Co
67.  o RSLogix 5000   user_doc  File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help    alsa  S  ele  oll ed a  Sa  ft le  ael   fo Edits z  Jferces Disabled z  03    Driver   lt none gt        g Abeta  H  dl   user ABE       Controller user_doc                             TimeriCounter Input Output                          Click on the slot number of  the module you want to see    Configuration information is  listed for each point on the  module located at Local 1 C    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999             4B 1756_DI1 C 0                                                       Local 1 1 AB 1756_DI_Timest     Local 2 C AB 1756_DO_AC_E     Local 2   AB 1756_DO_AC_E     Local 2 0 4B 1756_D0 0 0   Local 3 C AB 1756_DILAC_Di   Local 3 1 AB 1756_DI_AC_Di                 E        Local 4B 1756_DO_DC_  4B 1756_DO_DC_    AB 1756_D0 0 0              Local 4         Local                w  v  v  me fe e e e Meie                         Description  lt                                                         Funt 4B 1756_DI1 C 0  t Local 1 C DiagCOSDisable 1   Decimal BOOL   Local 1 C FilterOffOn_0_  1  Decimal SINT  HLocal 1 C Filter0n0ftf_0_7 9  Decimal SINT  HLocal 1 C Filter0ffOn_8_15 1  Decimal SINT  HLocal 1 C Fiter0n0t_8_15 9  Decimal SINT  HLocal 1 C Filter0ffOn_16_23 0  Decimal SINT  HLocal 1 C Filter0n0ff_16_23 0  Decimal SINT  HLocal 1 C Fiter0ffOn_24_31 0  Decimal SINT          Using Software Configuration Tags A 11       Changing Configuration  Through the Tags  
68.  pt  e fused output module 20 pin  1756 0B16D 19 30V dc 16 pt  diagnostic output module 36 pin  1756 0B16E 10 31V dc 16 pt  e fused output module 20 pin  1756 0B16l 10 30V dc 16 pt  isolated output module 36 pin  1756 0B32 10 31V de 32 pt  output module 36 pin  1756 0B8 10 30V dc 8 pt  output module 20 pin  1756 OB8El 10 30V dc 8 pt  e fused isolated output module 36 pin  1756 0C8 30 60V dc 8 pt  output module 20 pin  1756 0H8I 90 146V dc 8 pt  isolated output module 36 pin  1756 ON8 10 30V ac 8 pt  output module 20 pin  1756 OW16l 10 265V dc 16 pt  isolated relay output module 36 pin  1756 0X8l 10 265V  5 150V dc 8 pt  isolated relay normally open    36 pin   normally closed output module             Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules  1 3       Features of the ControlLogix Digital I O Modules    ControlLogix 1 0 Module              DC OUTPUT                         ControlBus  Connector                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      3       Indicators   st orzaasor fH        Locking tab  lo   Removable Terminal Block      T  O o a el     o D     C  ee  gt     Top an z      bottom Connector pins  gt 00    D D  guides         lt     Slots for  lt H  H keying the D             RB 9        o q     ee    Cl  
69.  remote chassis  you  must follow all the detailed procedures with two additional  steps  An explanation of the additional steps is listed at the end    of this chapter     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    6 2 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules    Overview of the  Configuration Process    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    RSLogix 5000 Configuration Software    Use RSLogix 5000 software to set configuration for your ControlLogix  digital I O module  You have the option of accepting default configuration  for your module or writing point level configuration specific to your  application     Both options are explained in detail  including views of software screens  in  this chapter     When you use the RSLogix 5000 software to configure a ControlLogix  digital I O module  you must perform the following steps     1  create a new module    2  accept the default configuration or change it to specific configuration for  the module    3  edit configuration for a module when changes are needed    Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 3       The following diagram shows an overview of the configuration process     Click on the Next Button to  Set Specific Configuration          New Module    1 Select a module  from the list   2 Choose a Major  Revision          Naming Screen  Name    Description  Slot number  Comm  format  Minor revision  Keying choice                Click on the Finish Button to  Use Default Configuration                          
70.  system level installation manual     Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       wana    CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations   FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 16 Module Specific Information       1756 IC16    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                 Feature Default value Page of description  Standard change of state OFF ON  Enabled 2 4  ON OFF  Enabled  Input filter time OFF ON  1ms 3 8  ON OFF  1ms  Communications format Input data             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module                                      NOTES  All terminals with the same name are  connected together on the module   For example  DC COM can be connected  to any terminal marked GND 1                                            When you daisy chain from a group to  another RTB  always connect the daisy  chain to the terminal directly connected  to the supply wire  as shown            an    Slelelelelelelelele                      This wiring example shows a single  voltage source                                                                             Se leelselcelecleslcsleclenics                                                                    
71.  table describes  what this chapter contains and its location     For information about    Determining Input Module Compatibility  Determining Output Module Compatibility  Using Features Common to ControlLogix  Standard Digital 1 0 Modules                            Using Features Specific to Standard Input 3 8  Modules  Using Features Specific to Standard Output 3 9  Modules  Fault and Status Reporting Between Input 3 14    Modules and Controllers   Fault and Status Reporting Between Output  Modules and Controller   Chapter Summary and What   s Next             ControlLogix digital input modules interface to sensing devices and detect  whether they are ON or OFF     ControlLogix input modules convert ac or dc ON OFF signals from user  devices to appropriate logic level for use within the processor  Typical  input devices include     proximity switches  limit switches  selector switches  float switches  pushbutton switches    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    3 2 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features       2 For more information        Determining Output  Module Compatibility    2  For more information       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    When designing a system using ControlLogix input modules  you must  consider     the voltage necessary for your application   whether you need a solid state device   current leakage   if your application should use sinking or sourcing wiring     For more information on compatibility of other Allen Bradley Company  prod
72.  the set  position once it has been triggered  even if the error condition causing the  fault to occur disappears     Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by the Reset Diagnostic Latch  service  For an example of how to enable or reset diagnostic latches  see  page 6 13 for diagnostic input modules and pagel6 14 for diagnostic  output modules     Important  Diagnostic latches are also reset through a software reset or  when the I O module   s power is cycled     Diagnostic Timestamp    Diagnostic I O modules can timestamp the time when a fault occurs or  when it clears  This feature provides greater accuracy and flexibility in  running applications  Modules use the ControlLogix system clock from a  local controller to generate timestamps     ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 9       To use diagnostic timestamps  you must choose the appropriate  Communications Format during initial configuration  For more information  on choosing a Communications Format  see Chapte    8 Point AC 16 Point DC    Diagnostic ControlLogix digital I O modules provide various grouping of  points on different modules  The 8 point AC modules and 16 point DC  modules provide additional flexibility when designing module applications     Point Level Fault Reporting    Diagnostic I O modules set bits to indicate when a fault has occurred on a  point by point basis  The following fault conditions generate their own  unique fault bits           Table 4 A  Unique Fault Bits for 1 0 P
73.  using the input value  from that same channel  Because the input value is critical to your  application  the module prioritizes the sampling of inputs ahead of the  unlatch service request     This prioritization allows input channels to be sampled at the same  frequency and the process alarms to be unlatched in the time between  sampling and producing the real time input data     One Service Performed Per Instruction    Message instructions will only cause a module service to be performed once  per execution  For example  if a message instruction sends a service to the  module to unlatch the high high alarm on a particular channel  that  channel   s high high alarm will unlatch  but may be set on a subsequent  channel sample  The message instruction must then be reexecuted to  unlatch the alarm a second time     Using Ladder Logic B 3       Creating a New Tag    Double click here to  enter the Main Routine    After adding a message  instruction to a rung  you  must create a tag for the  message instruction    1 Right click on the  question mark     to see  this pull down menu     This ladder logic is written in the Main Routine section of RSLogix 5000      o RSLogix 5000   Unlatch_Alar    File Edit View Search Logic C    alsa  S     se    Offline hd       fo Edits z    Driver  AB_DF1 1       B  Controller Unlatch_Alarm_Ex    A Controller Tags  E Controller Fault Handler     Power Up Handler  ES  Tasks  BA MainTask  2B MainProgram   9  Program Tags  ea M ainR outine         
74. 000_0000_0  Binary DINT  Local  C  FaultValue 2 0000_0000_0 Binary DINT    Loeal 5 C ProgMode 2 0000_0000_0 Binary DINT  j Local 5 C ProgValue 2 0000_0000_0  Binary DINT    Local 5 C FaultLatchEn 2 0000_0000_0 Binary DINT    Local 5 C NoLoadEn 2 0000_0000_0 Binary DINT  j Local 5 C OutputVerifpEn 2 0000_0000_0 Binary DINT  Local 5 C FieldPwrLossEn 2 0000_0000_0 Binary DINT   l Local 5 1 Taaa 4B 1756_DO_AC_D  T              RSLogix 5000 will not allow you to enter invalid values for any feature  If  you enter an invalid value and then move the cursor to another field  the  following message appears  You cannot proceed until a valid value is  entered     RSLogix 5000  x     4 Q Failed to set the tag value to  25   The value string is invalid       Help         I Error 11063 0       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    A 12 Using Software Configuration Tags       1  Click on the far left side of the Value    Point by Point Configurable Features    For features  such as No Load enable  that are configured on a  point by point basis  there are two ways to change the configuration  You  can either     e use a pull down menu  or  e highlight the value of a particular feature for a particular point and type a    new value     Pull down menu         Controller Tags   Sample controller     Scope   Sample controller x  Filter  i x  Sort   Tag Name x               Local 4   SY   Local 4 0   ARTA    Local 5 C   i EERS  Local 5 C ProgT oF aultEn      AB 1756_DO_DC_  AB 1756_D0 0 0     AB 
75. 00_06BH 1111 Einar DINT  Local2   DataE cho 2 0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000  Binary DINT  i  Local 2 1 CST Timestamp  2 2  Decimal DINT 2   2 0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0001 Binary DINT  2 0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_1110 Binary DINT  F Local21  OutputVentyFaul 2 0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000 Binary DINT  Local 2  FieldPwiLoss   2 0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000_0000  Binary DINT  Loca20        eae AB 1756_DC             Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999          Troubleshooting Your Module 8 5       Determining Fault Type    When you are monitoring a module   s configuration properties in  RSLogix 5000 and receive a Communications fault message  the  Connection page lists the type of fault     E Module Properties   Local 2  1756 O0A8D 2 1   x     General Connection   Module Info   Configuration   Diagnostics   Pulse Test   Backplane          Requested Packet Interval  RPI     5    ms  0 1   750 0 ms   T Inhibit Module         I Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails        Module Fault  The fault type is listed here        Code 16 0204  Connection Request Error  Connection request  timed out               Status  Faulted Cancel   Bul    Help      For a detailed listing of the possible faults  their causes and suggested  solutions  see Module Faults in the online help     Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about troubleshooting the module     What   s Next    Move on to Appendix  Ato learn about the Tag Editor in RSLo
76. 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 54 Module Specific Information       1756 OX8I  Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                    Feature Default value Page of description  Communications format Output data  Program mode Off 6 11  Program to fault transition Disabled 6 11  Fault mode Off 6 11             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                NOTES  All terminals with the same name L1 0 la 2 1 OUT 0 N C  L2 0  are connected together on the L1 0 o____11 0 Hea 4 3 OUT 0 N O      module  For example  L1 0 can Isolated L1 1 J ie 5 OUT 1 N C   be connected to either terminal wiring L1 1  g le 7 OUT 1 N O    0    eo   Z x    marked L1 0 DC 2    O    L1 2  Ha jo 9g OUT 2 N C    oDC 2     L1 2  h2 1 OUT 2 N 0     When you use the third L1 7 L1 3 Hau Big OUT 3 N C   Era afereca ie dalo Jumper bar  Cut to length  7 i   je  i
77. 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  NEMA  7 9 inch pounds  0 8   1Nm   RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB  1756 TBNH or TBSH    Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 123  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch  8mm  maximum  Agency Certification D   when product or packaging is marked    e Class   Div 2 Hazardous    lt fm gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous         3 marked for all applicable directives          Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       a wan os    CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations   FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 24 Module Specific Information       1756 0A16    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  d
78. 1756_DO_AC_D  1 Decimal BOOL                                        column and a pull down menu appears    E5 E Faulthtode 2 0000_0000_0  Binary DINT    Local 5 C FaultValue y 2 0000_ 0000  Binary DINT    Local 5 C ProgMode 7 JEE DINT   HLocal 5 C ProgY alue 7 0  0 ojo DINT    Local5 C FautLatchEn ead    2 DINT  0  o                                        jHLocal 5 C NoLoadEn E p DINT     Local 5 C Output  erifyEn DINT     Local 5 C FieldPwrLossEn 2  000d 0000_0  Binary DINT    Local 5 I ah   4B 1756_DO_AC_D    Locat 5 l F ault  EENE  Binary DINT    Local 5   DataEcho 2 0004_0000_0   Binary DINT   Local 5 1 CST Timestamp       Decimal DINT 2    al nnal FI CST Limestamnl                                                                                                         2  Highlight the point that needs to be  changed and type a valid new value    NOTE  RSLogix 5000 will not allow you to  enter invalid values for point by point    Highlight value         Controller Tags   Sample controller     Scope   Sample controller  x  Filter   Show All 7  Sort  EEE x               Local 4 1      756_D0_DC_              Local 4 0    AB 1756_D0 0 0                    Local 5 C    4B 1756_DO_AC_D         Local 5 C ProgT oF aultEn    1  Decimal    BOOL        Local 5 C FaultMode    2 0000_0000_0  Binary    DINT         Local 5 C Fault  alue    2 0000_0000_0  Binary    DINT        Local 5 C ProgMode    2 0000_0000_0  Binary    DINT          1  Highlight the value of the feature  you want to
79. 20  Adjusting in RSLogix 5000 6 10   6 17  Retrieving Module Identification  Information 1 4  B 13  Retrieving Module Status 1 4  B 13    RSLogix 5000  Configuring I O modules 2 2   3 3  4 3  6 2  Using to troubleshoot 8 4  Using with RSNetWorx 2 2  RSNetWorx  Transferring data to networked  T O modules and establishing a  NUT 2 2  Using with RSLogix 5000 2 2    S   Scheduled Outputs 3 5  4 5  Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 7  Used with timestamping 3 6  4 6  Used with timestamping in ladder   logic B 9   Specifications  1756 IA16 module 7 3  1756 IA16I module 7 5  1756 IA8D module 7 7  1756 IB16 module 7 9  1756 IB16D module 7 11  1756 IB16I module 7 13  1756 IB32 module 7 15  1756 IC16 module 7 17  1756 IH16I module 7 19  1756 IM16I module 7 21  1756 IN16 module 7 23  1756 OA16 module 7 25  1756 OA16I module 7 27  1756 OA8 module 7 29  1756 OA8D module 7 31  1756 OA8E module 7 33  1756 OB16D module 7 35  1756 OB16E module 7 37  1756 OB 16I module 7 39  1756 OB32 module 7 41  1756 OB8 module 7 43  1756 OB8EI module 7 45  1756 OC8 module 7 47  1756 OH8I module 7 49  1756 ON8 module 7 51  1756 OW 16I module 7 53  1756 OX8I module 7 55    Status Indicators 1 3  System Time  Adjusting the RPI 6 10  Choosing a timestamped input  communications format 6 6  Choosing a timestamped output  communications format 6 7  Diagnostic timestamp 4 8  Schedule outputs 3 5  4 5  Timestamping inputs 3 5  4 5  Using a scheduled output data  communications format 6 7  Using scheduled outputs with  tim
80. 3  Change of State  COS  P 2  2 4   3 8  4 11  4 13  6 12  A 2  ClassI Division 2 Certification 1 1   3 7  3 8  4 8  Communications Format P 2  6 3   6 6  Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 5   6 7  Input module formats 6 6  Listen only 6 6  6 8  Listing for all I O modules 6 9  Output module formats 6 7  Rack optimization P 3  6 6  6 8  Compatible Match  Electronic keying 3 4  4 4  Configuration  Accessing module tags 6 22   A 10  Altering the default  configuration 6 10  Changing through module tags  A 11  Configuring a diagnostic input  module 6 13  Configuring a diagnostic output  module 6 14  Configuring a standard input  module 6 12  Configuring a standard output  module 6 12  Configuring modules in remote  chassis 6 18  Downloading new data A 13  Dynamic reconfiguration 6 15  Editing configuration in  RSLogix 5000 6 15    Index    Configuration  continued   Message configuration with  ladder logic B 4  Overview of the process 6 2  Reconfiguring in program mode  6 17  Reconfiguring in remote run  mode 6 16  Using module tags A 3  A 4   A 6  A 8  Using RSLogix 5000 6 2  Using the default configuration  6 10  Configuring a ControlLogix  System  Using RSLogix 5000 2 2  Using RSNetWorx 2 2  Configuring I O Modules 3 3  4 3  Connections P 2  Direct connection P 2  Listen only connection P 3  Listen only rack optimization  2 13  Rack connection 2 13  Rack optimization 2 13  2 14   6 6  6 8  Scheduled output data 6 7  ControlBus Connector P 2  1 3  Controller  Logix5550 Controller P 1
81. 4 33 4 OUT 30  DC 1    E  36 35 4 RTN OUT 1  5  Daisy chain to Daisy chain to  other RTBs   z other RTBs  DC COM 40171 M  DC 0    Surge Current Chart LED indicator  D      gt  DC OUTPUT  OUT 0     ST 01234567 3  mm E ya  Sue Aasi r  OUT 0 8 Continuous 11112222 K   gt    60  C 67890123     0 5A c 22222233  ST 45678901  4 4  30347 M Time loms 40851 M 40465 M    Module Specific Information 7 41       1756 0B32 Specifications       Number of Outputs    32  16 points common        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    300mA   5 1V dc  amp  2mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 1 58W        Maximum Power Dissipation  Module     4 8W   60  C       Thermal Dissipation    16 37 BTU hr                            Output Voltage Range 10 31 2V de   50  C  Linear derating   10 28V de   60  C  Output Current Rating  Per Point 0 5A maximum   50  C  Linear derating   0 35A maximum   60  C  Per Module 16A maximum   50  C  Linear derating   10A maximum   60  C  Surge Current per Point 1A for 10ms each  repeatable every 2s   60  C  Minimum Load Current 3mA per point  Maximum On State Voltage Drop 200mV dc   0 5A  Maximum Off State Leakage Current 0 5mA per point  Output Delay Time  Off to on 1ms maximum  On to off ims maximum  Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum  reference to the CST       Configurable Fault States per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Configurable States in Program Mode per Point    Hold Last Stat
82. 415  FLT 8 9 10111213 1415       DIAGNOSTIC 40463 M    1756 0B32       gt   DC OUTPUT    ST 01234567    stgg 111111       0123  111122  ST 67 8901  222222  ST 45 6789          40465 M    1756 OW161                 RELAY OUTPUT  qj    ace  ST 8 9 10111213 1415       40455 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Troubleshooting Your Module    Using RSLogix 5000 to  Troubleshoot Your Module       In addition to the LED display on the module  RSLogix 5000 will alert you  to fault and other conditions  You will be alerted in one of three ways     e Warning signal on the main screen next to the module This occurs when  the connection to the module is broken    e Message in a screen   s status line    e Notification in the Tag Editor   General module faults are also reported  in the Tag Editor  Diagnostic faults are only reported in the Tag Editor    e Status on the Module Info page    The screens below display fault notification in RSLogix 5000     Warning signal on main screen      0  RSLogix 5000   Light_switch    BEE    File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help             Driver  AB_DF1 1          B E Controller Light_switch    a a a FAST               MainProgram   MainRoutine       Es    4  gt   user  Bt K TimerCounter K TnputiOutput KT              A Controller Tags  E Controller Fault Handler  E Power Loss Handler  I Tasks  S A MainTask   E  MainProgram   A Program Tags   E  MainRoutine     Unscheduled Programs  BG Data Types  Gi User Defined    Gi Pre
83. 6l    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                 Feature Default value Page of description  Standard change of state OFF ON  Enabled 2 4  ON OFF  Enabled  Input filter time OFF ON  1ms 3 8  ON OFF  1ms  Communications format Input data             Wiring example                                                                                                                                                    Use the following example to wire your module                                                                                                     aed  DC 0    o     np 0  lo   11    into       o o   o DC 0     Isolated GND 1 T4 sir   IN 1  NOTES  All terminals with the same name are ial GND 2 a aes Ne a  connected together on the module  ARAE a a       A a A  For example  DC    can be connected GND 5 da   IN 5  to either terminal marked GND 15  ais a ae fis  DC 7    o       GND 7 ie 18 7     oo o DC   When you use the second GND 15 vale i 2 i re j T   ee  terminal to daisy chain to other RTBs  J     AL  a      umper bar  Cut to length  GND 9  1 2 194 IN 9  always connect the daisy chain to the j GND 10    ee N 10 ws  terminal directly connected to the GND 11 z i nO Na oe  supply wire  as shown  Non isolated GND 12 E    252 IN 12  wiring   z7 5 olo  The jumper bar part number is a H z   M i s     97739201  Contact your local GND  i 3 aaa Na 5
84. 756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 12    Module Specific Information       1756 IB16l    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                 Feature Default value Page of description  Standard change of state OFF ON  Enabled 2 4  ON OFF  Enabled  Input filter time OFF ON  1ms 3 8  ON OFF  1ms  Communications format Input data             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  l  Isolated DC 0       GND 0     2 1   IN 0    o   o      DC 0 a     wiring DC 1    o      GND 1 ja 3 IN 1    o o        DC 1     NOTES  All terminals with the same name are T qd e 5 hi  connected together on the module  ri i D87 E  For example  DC    can be connected Source Input wiring GND 4 10 9 IN 4  to either terminal marked GND 15  DC 5    o   o o4 GND 5 p2 n IN 5       __o     DC 5     DC 6    o   o  0    GND 6  E    2E IN 6       _o     DC 6     When you use the second GND 15 GND 7 16 15 G IN 7  terminal to daisy chain to other RTBs  GND 8  lis 79 IN 8  always connect the daisy chain to the Jumper bar  Cut to length    GND 9 
85. 8   July 1999    Using Software Configuration Tags             Output Data Tag  Table A E  Standard Output Module Output Data Tags  Name  as listed in Configuration Definition   the Tag Editor   or 1 0 Data   CSTTimestamp Output data Coordinated System Time Timestamp     Timestamp to be used with   8 bytes  Scheduled Outputs and Coordinated System Time  CST   Used to  synchronize outputs across the system by indicating the time  CST  Timestamp  at which the output module is to apply its outputs   Data Output data Off On status for the output point  originating from the controller   1 bit per point  0 Off  1 On             Diagnostic Input Module Tags    The following tables list and define all tags that may be used for  ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules  Input modules have  two types of tags  configuration and input data     Important  The table below lists all possible diagnostic input module tags   In each application  though  the series of tags varies  depending    on how the module is configured     Configuration Tags             Table A F  Diagnostic Input Module Configuration Tags  Name  as listed in Configuration Definition   the Tag Editor   or 1 0 Data   COSOnOffEn Configuration Change of State ON to OFF     Triggers an event in the controller for ON to   1bit per point  OFF transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data  table as soon as possible  The CST timestamp is also updated   O disable  1 enable  COS OffOnEn Configuration
86. 8 I AB 1756_Dl_Time     F  Local 8 C 4B 1756_D1 C 0     Local 7 0 4B 1756_D0 0 0 e   LAT Monitor Tags    Edit Tags   er   fy       The user defined WHO data  structure displays module  identification information in    an easily understood format     For example  major revision  displays that the module   s  major revision is 2     Using Ladder Logic B 13       Performing a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification and Status    This ladder logic example shows how to retrieve module identification and  status through a WHO service  In this application  a message instruction  retrieves the following module identification information     Product type  Product code  Major revision  Minor revision  Status   Vendor   Serial number  String length  Ascii string    A full explanation of each module identification category above is provided  after the ladder logic application     Important  This example uses a user defined WHO data structure and a  series of Copy instructions  following the Message instruction  in the screen capture below  to make the module identification  information more easily understood     The user defined data structure appears below          Controller Tags   who controller   Iof x     Scope    who controller  7  Show   Show All z  Sot   Tag Name hs           Local 3 C       7         FoceMask    f Style         AB 1756_DI C 0           Local 3                     4  WHO  vendor       ae  hoe    AB 1756_D1 1 0       TEE    WHO_Informatior          16 0001    Hex   
87. CST_Information  0  Current_Time 8  SINT 20  DINT 2   Status of CST in Module CST_Information 8  CST_Status 2  BitO  O timer OK  1 timer fault INT  Bit1  O no ramping  1 ramping  ramping  indicates that once time is synchronized   it will correct errors by slowly ramping to  the master   s time   Bit2  O not time master  1 time master   e g  controller   Bit3  O time not synced  1 time synced  with master  Size of timer in bits CST_Information 1 0  CST_Timer_Size 2  INT  Unused CST_Information 1 2  CST_reserved 8                   Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Table B B    Copy Instruction Parameters for Module Services    Using Ladder Logic    B 7                                        Source Destination   Description  Copy Instruction  COP    This instruction moves data to   Tag in MSG from generic source destination buffers  insucuen  Source Destination Length   bytes   WHO_Information Device manufacturer   s vendor ID  e g  WHO_Information 0  WHO_vendor 2  SINT 47  1 AB  INT  Device   s product type  e g  7 Digital 1 0    WHO_Information 2  WHO_product_type 2  INT  Device   s catalog code which maps to its   WHO_Information 4  WHO_catalog_code 2  catalog number INT  Device   s major revision WHO_Information 6  WHO_major_revision 1  SINT  Device   s minor revision WHO_Information 7  WHO_minor_revision 1  SINT  Device   s internal status WHO_Information 8  WHO_status 2  BitO  O unowned  1 owned INT  Bit2  O unconfigured  1 configured  Bits7 4  forms a 4 bit number i
88. Configuration      Backplane      Output State During    Program Mode   Fault Mode                Communications Failure    If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state    Program Mode  Change outputs to Fault Mode state    Status  Running Cancel   Apply   Help                     2  Click here to download Click here to download  the new data and close the new data and keep  the screen the screen open    Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 17       Reconfiguring Module Change the controller from Run Mode to Program Mode before changing  Parameters in Program Mode configuration       o RSLogix 5000   User_doc  File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools    Window Help    alsa a sele AA Sd A e lel     Go Offline  Upload As                          Use this pull down menu to               _  switch to Program Mode lund del    L  Test Mode          E Module Properties   Local 1  1756 0A8 1 1        Clear Faults  Go To Faults         General   Connection   Module Info   Configuration   Backplane    Type  1756 048 8 Point 74   265   AC Output    ult Handler  E Power Loss Handler    Make any necessary changes  For example  the RPI can only be changed in  Program Mode and Remote Program Mode        E Module Properties   Local 1  1756 0A8 1 1  x     General Connection    Module Info   Configuration   Backplane      1  Update the RPI rate p p nterva  RPI   0  ms  0 1   750 0 ms     T  Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails    Module Fault   
89. ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules  1 1  Using an 1 0 Module in the ControlLogix 1 2  System   Types of ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules  Features of the ControlLogix Digital 1 0 1 3  Modules       Preventing Electrostatic Discharge  Removal and Insertion Under Power  Chapter Summary and What   s Next                ControlLogix digital I O modules are input output modules that provide  ON OFF detection and actuation     Using the producer consumer network model  they can produce information  when needed while providing additional system functions     The following is a list of the features available on ControlLogix digital I O  modules that allow greater system applicability     e Removal and insertion under power  RIUP    a system feature that  allows you to remove and insert modules and RTB while power is  applied   e Producer consumer communications   an intelligent data exchange  between modules and other system devices in which each module  produces data without having been polled   e Module level fault reporting and field side diagnostic detection   e System timestamp of data   64 bit system clock places a timestamp on  the transfer of data between the module and its owner controller within    the local chassis    e Class I Division 2  UL  CSA  FM and CE Agency Certification    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    1 2 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules        Using an 1 0 Module in ControlLogix modules mount in a ControlLogix chassis and use a  the ControlLogix S
90. Detection    This feature is used when field power to the module is lost or zero cross  cannot be detected  A point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the  exact point faulted     Important  Only enable Field Power Loss detection for points that are in  use  If this feature is enabled for points that are not in use  you  will receive faults for those points during operation     This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user  program in the event of a fault  For more information on these tags  see    Appendix  A     For an example of how to enable the Field Power Loss detection diagnostic     see pag a 6 14       Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules    Using the Diagnostic Change of State feature  a diagnostic output module  sends new data to the owner controller when one of three events occurs     e Requested Packet Interval   user defined interval for scheduled  updates during normal module operation    e Receipt of Output Data   an output module echoes data back to the  owner controller    e Diagnostic Change of State   any change in the diagnostics for a  particular output point    Unlike diagnostic input modules  this feature cannot be disabled for    diagnostic output modules  If any of the three events described above  occurs  the output module sends new data to the owner controller     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    4 20 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features    Fault and Status Reporting  Between Input
91. ECTRONICALLY FUSED  41118 M 0 Time 43ms  40852 M 20995 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Module Specific Information 7 33       1756 OA8E Specifications       Number of Outputs    8  4 points common        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    200mA   5 1V dc  amp  250mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 7 02W        Maximum Power Dissipation  Module     5 5W   60  C       Thermal Dissipation    18 76 BTU hr          Output Voltage Range 74 132V ac  47 63Hz   Output Current Rating  Per Point 2A maximum   60  C  Per Group 4A maximum   30  C  amp  2A max   60  C  Linear derating   Per Module 8A maximum   30  C  amp  4A max   60  C  Linear derating        Surge Current per Point    20A for 43ms each  repeatable every 2s   60  C                      Minimum Load Current 10mA per point  Maximum On State Voltage Drop 4V peak   2A  Maximum Off State Leakage Current 3mA per point  Output Delay Time  Off to on 9 3ms   60Hz  11ms   50Hz  On to off 9 3ms   60Hz  11ms   50Hz  Diagnostic Functions  Short Trip  gt 20A for 100ms minimum  Field Power Loss  Zero Cross  Detects at 25V peak minimum  Firmware phase locked loop   Time stamp of Diagnostics     1ms  Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum  reference to Coordinated    System Time       Configurable Fault States per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Configurable States in Program Mode per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default      
92. G OUT 3 N O   chain to the terminal directly L1 4 18 17 OUT 4 N C   connected to the supply wire  as   7 Qz 19 OUT 4N 0   shown  L1 5  12 21 4 QUT 5 N C         L1 5  oia 23g OUT 5 N O  y      When using the jumper bar to Non isolated L1 6  2 25 OUT 6 N C      daisy chain terminals together as wiring L1 6  l2 27 OUT 6 N 0         e  shown  the maximum current L1 7  14 130 29 OUT 7 N C        e  you may apply to the module L1 7  E2 31     OUT 7 N 0    af  a a single contact point L1     u 7 a 3   Not used i  i a Not used        36 35        Not used fe   The jumper bar part number is   L2  97739201  Contact your local    Rockwell Automation sales    representative to order additional   30041 M  jumper bars  if necessary  Daisy chain to other RTBs  Simplified schematic LED indicator   24V   gt  eee E iid    gt  RELAY OUTPUT      CD 8  h 2   il sT012345679  i 5 0   OUT 0 N C     Ee  Control Bus   Cc      Interface 1   i l C  gt    on OUT 0 N O   Display     gt   30344 M 40456 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Module Specific Information 7 55       1756 OX8I Specifications                Specification  Value  Specification  Value    Number of Outputs 8 N 0   amp  8 N C   2 points common  UL Ratings C300  R150 Pilot Duty  Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Minimum Load Current 10mA per point  Backplane Current 100mA   5 1V dc  amp  100mA   24V dc Initial Contact Resistance  30mQ     Total backplane power 2 91W                 Maximum Power 3 1W   60  C Switching Fr
93. IN 17   g2 19 IN 16    either terminal marked GND 1  IN 19   l2 21  PT    IN 18 al ae  IN 21    Tay  24 23 IN 20  When you daisy chain to other IN 23 al 25   IN 22  RTBs  always connect the daisy Group 1 IN 25  E 2s 27 IN 24 Group 1  chain to the terminal directly IN 27   Eo 29   IN 26  connected to the supply wire  IN 29  E32 31 DTI   IN 28  as shown  IN 31 Ola 3 IN 30  T GND 1 l3 35 E GND 1  This wiring example shows a    single voltage source      Daisy chain to  other RTBs        DC COM 40172 M  Simplified schematic LED indicator  5V  IN 0 J    DC INPUT  Cc  ST 01234567 3  an vad eee      gt   lt    11112222   E  t   ST 67890123     GND aa gt 22 222233  ControlBus Display a dae  Interface 30183 M 30082 M             Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Module Specific Information 7 15       1756 IB32 Specifications       Number of Inputs    32  16 points common        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    150mA   5 1V dc  amp  2mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 0 81W                             Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  4 5W   60  C  Thermal Dissipation 16 37 BTU hr   60  C  On State Voltage Range 10 31 2V de  Nominal Input Voltage 24V dc  On State Current 2mA   10V dc minimum  5 5 mA   31 2V dc maximum  Maximum Off State Voltage 5V dc  Maximum Off State Current 1 5mA  Maximum Input Impedance   31 2V dc 5 67kQ        Input Delay Time       Off to on Programmable filter  Oms  1ms or 2ms  Hardware delay 1ms maximum plus filter t
94. If you do not  refer  to the Logix5550 Controller user manual  publication 1756 6 5 12  before  you attempt to use this module     This manual describes how to install  configure  and troubleshoot your  ControlLogix digital I O module     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    P 2 About This User Manual       Conventions and Related Terms This manual uses the following conventions     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999                                           This icon  Calls attention to   m helpful  time saving information  an example  Example    additional information in the  m For more information publication referenced  Terms  This term  Means   Broadcast Data transmissions to all address or functions  Bumpless A reconfiguration in which the real time data connection  reconfiguration to the module is not closed and reopened   Communications are never interrupted and configuration  data is applied to the module immediately  This works  best in a single owner controller system   Change of state  COS  Any change in the ON or OFF state of a point on an 1 0    module       Communications format    Format that defines the type of information transferred  between an I O module and its owner controller  This  format also defines the tags created for each 1 0 module        Compatible match    An electronic keying protection mode that requires that  the physical module and the module configured in the  software to match according to vendor and catalog  number  In this case  the mi
95. Inhibit Voltage    Zero crossing 60V peak       Fusing    Not protected   Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs  See  publication 1492 2 12        Isolation Voltage  Channel to channel    100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   265V ac maximum continuous voltage between channels                             User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  Cage clamp  4 4 inch pounds  0 4Nm  maximum  RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB  1756 TBCH or TBS6H    Environmental Conditions   Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F    Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F    Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded    3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 43 4   Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch  3 2mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous     lt fm gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous            marked for all applicable directives       Commutating dv dt of output voltage  OUTPUT to L2  should not exceed 0 2V 1s for loads under 50mA  Commutating dv dt rating of module for loads    50 500mA  OUTPUT TO L2  is 4V us maximum  If commutating dv dt rating of TRIAC is exceeded  TRIAC could latch on  If commutating dv dt rating  is exceeded in the 10 50mA range  a resistor may be added across the output and L2  The purpose of this resistor is to i
96. Insert the wire into the terminal     2  Turn the screw clockwise to close the terminal on the wire        of           D    Strain relief area       o O 20859 M    e NEMA clamp   Catalog number 1756 TBNH    Terminate wires at the screw terminals        AF  DE  1 E                                                          nD   Strain relief area N       e Spring clamp   Catalog number 1756 TBSH or TBS6H    1  Insert the screwdriver into the outer hole of the RTB     2  Insert the wire into the open terminal and remove the screwdriver                                                                                                           EN J   DE   iral   E   Hana g a   LED   EDT    es  E     A    ED  E   OED  E   pE E   15 Strain relief area SROM                      Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    5 4 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module       Recommendations for Wiring Your RTB    Consider the following guidelines when wiring your RTB   e Begin wiring the RTB at the bottom terminals and move up   e Use a tie to secure the wires in the strain relief area of the RTB     e The jumper bar part number is 97739201  Contact your local Rockwell  Automation sales representative to order additional jumper bars  if  necessary     e Order and use an extended depth housing  Cat  No 1756 TBE  for  applications that require heavy gauge wiring  For more information  see  page 5 6      Refer to below for the page number of the specific wiring diagram for each  ControlLogix I O modu
97. KBE A Tmercouter A hpaloapa J    E Controller User_doc   Controller Tags   E Controller Fault Handler   E Power Loss Handler   5 6 Tasks    a  MainTask   3 8 MainProgram  Program Tags    E  MainRoutine  EI Unscheduled Programs      Data Types     R User Defined   Gi Predefined                                                                                         1 Select 1 0 Configuration    2 Click on the right mouse  button to display the menu    3 Select New Module                   Create a module    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    A screen    Select Module Type    Type     fi 756 048           1  Select a module          _      Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 5       appears with a list of possible new modules for your application               Major Revision     fi  gt    lt        Make sure the    Major Revision        16 Point 10   30   AC Input number matches  6 Channel Isolated RTD Analog      6 Channel Isolated Thermocouph the label on the    ControlLogix5550 Programmable side of your module  2 Axis Analog Encoder Servo   16 Point 74V 265V AC Output   16 Point 74V 265V AC Isolated Output  8 Point 74V 265V AC Output   8 Point 74   132   AC Diagnostic Output  8 Point 74   132   AC Electronically Fused Output  16 Point 19 2   30   DC Diagnostic Output   16 Point 10  31 2   DC Electronically Fused Output               H       Show  Vendor   Allen Bradley Company  Inc  7  Select All    MV Analog WM Digital     Communication   Motion   Processo
98. Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    100mA   5 1V dc  amp  2mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 0 56W                             Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  5 1W   60  C   Thermal Dissipation 17 39 BTU hr   On State Voltage Range 10 31 2V de   Nominal Input Voltage 24V dc   On State Current 2 0mA   10V dc minimum  10mA   31 2V dc maximum   Maximum Off State Voltage 5V   Maximum Off State Current 1 5mA   Maximum Input Impedance   31 2V dc 3 12kQ       Input Delay Time       Off to on Programmable filter  Oms  1ms or 2ms  Hardware delay 1ms maximum plus filter time  On to off Programmable filter  Oms  1ms  2ms  9ms or 18ms  Hardware delay 2ms maximum plus filter time  Diagnostic Functions  Change of State Software configurable    Time Stamp of Inputs        200us       Short Inrush Current    250mA peak  decaying to  lt 37  in 22ms  without activation        Cyclic Update Time    User selectable  100us minimum 750ms maximum                                   Reverse Polarity Protection Yes  Isolation Voltage  Group to group 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  NEMA clamp  7 9 inch pounds  0 8 1Nm   RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB  1756 TBNH or TBSH   Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperatur
99. Module     Configuration  Data  Con B XXXXX  XXXXX  XXXXX  J                       41056    As soon as a controller receives its user program  it will try to establish a  connection with the input module  Whichever controller   s configuration  data arrives first establishes a connection  When the second controller   s data  arrives  the module compares it to its current configuration data  the data  received and accepted from the first controller      If the configuration data sent by the second controller matches the data sent  by the first controller  that connection is also accepted  If any parameter of  the second configuration data is different from the first  the module rejects  the connection and the user is informed by an error in the software or  programatically via a ladder logic program     The advantage of multiple owners over a    Listen mode    connection is that  now either of the controllers can break the connection to the module and the  module will continue to operate and multicast data to the system because of  the connection maintained by the other controller     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    2 12 Digital 1 0 Operation Within the ControlLogix System       Configuration Changes in an  Input Module with Multiple    Owners    Initial Configuration       Input Module  Configuration  Data  XXXXX  22222  XXXXX             Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    You must be careful when changing an input module   s configuration data in  a multiple owner s
100. Name  as listed in Configuration Definition   the Tag Editor   or 1 0 Data   FaultMode Configuration Fault Mode     Used in conjunction with FaultValue to configure the state of     1 bit per point     outputs when a communications fault occurs  See FaultValue   0 Use FaultValue  OFF or ON   1 Hold Last State          FaultValue Configuration Fault Value     Used in conjunction with FaultMode to configure the state of   1 bit per point  outputs when a communications fault occurs  See FaultMode    O OFF  1 0N  ProgMode Configuration Program Mode     Used in conjunction with ProgValue to configure the state     1 bit per point        of outputs when the controller is in Program Mode  See ProgValue   0 Use ProgValue  OFF or ON   1 Hold Last State          Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Using Software Configuration Tags A 5                Table A C   Standard Output Module Configuration Tags  Name  as listed in Configuration Definition   the Tag Editor   or 1 0 Data   ProgValue Configuration Program Value     Used in conjunction with ProgMode to configure the state   1 bit per point  of outputs when the controller is in Program Mode  See ProgMode    0 Off  1 0n   ProgToFaultEn Configuration Program to Fault Transition     Diagnostic enables the transitioning of     1 byte per module        outputs to FaultMode if a communications failure occurs in Program Mode   Otherwise outputs will remain in ProgramMode  See ProgMode  ProgValue   FaultMode  FaultValue    0 outputs stay 
101. OBI1GE 22 cy ket sae ie EEE PERAS cade 7 38    Troubleshooting Your Module    Using Software  Configuration Tags    Using Ladder Logic    1756 OB32 rrera i ska ee a E TARE Pelee ey es 7 40  17560QB baue ar a A heey E a hanes 7 42  TISG OB SE oe sales pe hl Fo ie OO al ht fy acy 7 44  L750 OCS vis Sr45 heb a EO oe Re eee EE es 7 46  NP SG OON os cairn prem ena ne Ses  eee aes 4 ee eed 7 48  LISO ONS n sates Ae banhen Bee CRO TARE OSSD EA RAY 7 50  ViISG O WIG essensa et a a eae ee aes 7 52  VTDO O XS  Fis aac Grea gin ee aay ba Oa ase ee 7 54  Chapter Summary and What   s Next                  00   7 56  Chapter 8  What This Chapter Contains               0 0 00    eee eee 8 1  Using Indicators to Troubleshoot Your Module               8 1  LED indicators for input modules                   0   8 1  LED indicators for output modules                      8 2  Using RSLogix 5000 to Troubleshoot Your Module           8 4  Determining Fault Types ss 020s ead Ss pas Bie ee 2 8 5  Chapter Summary and What   s Next                 00000  8 5  Appendix A  Module Tag Names and Definitions                        A 3  Standard Input Module Tags                     0000  A 3  Standard Output Module Tags                     000  A 4  Diagnostic Input Module Tags                    004  A 6  Diagnostic Output Module Tags                    04  A 8  Accessing the Tags  iors  gos deseo te Roe ee ee ee A 10  Changing Configuration Through the Tags                  A 11  Module wide Configurabl
102. ON8 module 7 50  1756 OW16I module 7 52  1756 OX8I module 7 54    AB Allen Bradley  Ty Publication Problem Report    If you find a problem with our documentation  please complete and return this form     Pub  Name ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules User Manual                                              Cat  No  1756 Series Pub  No  1756 6 5 8 Pub  Date July 1999 Part No  955135 65  Check Problem s  Type  Describe Problem s  Internal Use Only   L  Technical Accuracy C  text  C  illustration   L  Completeness    procedure step  C  illustration  C  definition  _  info in manual   What information is missing        example  C  guideline  _  feature  accessibility     C  explanation C  other  C  info not in   C  Clarity       What is unclear               C  Sequence       What is not in the right order               L  Other Comments       Use back for more comments                          Your Name Location Phone             Return to  Marketing Communications  Allen Bradley   1 Allen Bradley Drive  Mayfield Hts   OH 44124 6118Phone   440  646 3176  FAX   440  646 4320       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999 PN 955135 65    PLEASE FASTEN HERE  DO NOT STAPLE     Other Comments                                        PLEASE FOLD HERE    BUSINESS REPLY MAIL  FIRST CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO  18235 CLEVELAND OH  POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY THE ADDRESSEE    OA Rockwell Automation  Allen Bradley    1 ALLEN BRADLEY DR  MAYFIELD HEIGHTS OH 44124 9705    NO POSTAGE  NECESSARY  IF MAILED    IN THE
103. Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Fusing    Not protected   Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs  See  publication 1492 2 12        Reverse Polarity Protection    None   If module is wired incorrectly  outputs may be damaged                                Isolation Voltage  Group to group 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  NEMA  7 9 inch pounds  0 8 1Nm   RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB  1756 TBNH or TBSH   Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 123  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch  8mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked               e Class   Div 2 Hazardous    lt N Class   Div 2 Hazardous       APPROVED    marked for all applicable directives       kwon 4    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Divis
104. ProgValue 2 0000_0000_0 Binary DINT  Diagnostic latch enable EL HLocal 5 C FaultLatchEn 2 0000_0000_0  Binary DINT  No load enabled       HLocal 5 C NoLoadEn 2 0000_0000_0 Binary DINT      b gt   Local 5 C OutputVerifyEn 2 0000_0000_0 Binay DINT  Output verify enable E CLocat5 C FieldPwLossEn 2 0000_0000_0 Binary DINT  Field power loss enable    E Locat5 1 fazat 4B 1756_DO_AC_D      ocak 5 1 Fault 2 0000_0000_0  Binary DINT  E   Local 5   DataEcho 2 0000_0000_0 Binary DINT  E  Local 5   CST Timestamp       Decimal DINT 2       Local 5   FuseBlown 2 0000_0000_0   Binary DINT  E   Local 5   NoLoad 2 0000_0000_0 Binary DINT  m t Local 5   OutputVerifyFault 2 0000_0000_0 Binay DINT  E LLocat 5 l FieldPwrLoss 2 0000_0000_0   Binary DINT   gt   e AB 1756_D0 0 0      ULocat5 0 Data 2 0000_0000_0  Binary DINT       MonitorTags AedtTags 7      XP e          Diagnostic Latch  No Load   Output Verify  Field Power Loss    Program Mode and Value    When you access the tags for this module as described on page  A 10  you  will see the following screen                                                                                                                                                               Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Using Message Instructions    Appendix B    Using Ladder Logic    You can use ladder logic to perform run time services on your module  For  example  page 6 21 shows how to reset an electronic fuse on the  1756 OA8D module using RSLogix 5000  This ap
105. Starter  1756 0A16l 16 16 16 16   30  C 11  30  C  13   60  C 9  60  C  1756 0A16 16 16 16 4 2   Only 2 per group     Only 1 per group   1756 0A8 8 8 8 8 8                      Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    D 2    Driving Motor Starters with ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules          Table D C  Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Motor Starter  24V ac 60Hz   Catalog Number   Size 0 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5  Motor Starter   Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter Motor Starter  1756 ON8 4 30C 4 30C None None None  3 60C 3 60C                      Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Determining the Maximum Number of Motor Starters    To determine the maximum number of motor starters that can be used by a  particular 1756 catalog number refer to the following example     1  Choose your motor starter     Allen Bradley Bulletin 500 Size 3 120V ac 60Hz  2 3 Poles  Inrush  1225VA  Sealed 45VA    2  Determine the number of Motor starters required for your application     12 size 3 motor starters    3  Choose a ControlLogix digital output module     1756 OA16I A  Output voltage   74     265V ac    Output steady state current per point   2A maximum   30  C   amp  1A maximum   60 C  Linear derating    Output steady state current per module   5A maximum   30  C   amp  4A maximum   60 C  Linear derating    Output surge current per point   20A maximum for 43mS  repeatable every 2S   60 C      Determine the maximum environmental operating temperature     o    50 C      Confirm the volt
106. VED    marked for all applicable directives       kwon 4    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 48 Module Specific Information       1756 0H8I  Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                    Feature Default value Page of description  Communications format Output data  Program mode Off 6 11  Program to fault transition Disabled  Fault mode Off 6 11             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             E  none     1 L pe o    2 1 4 OUT 0 ___  ___  Isolated z RTN OUT 0 j4 3 q OUT 0  wiring DC 1      e 5 OUT 1    RINOUT 1   e 7 OUT 1  L L pe 2t4    Pep
107. Wire Size    22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum          Category 423  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch  3 2mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous    lt N Class   Div 2 Hazardous       APPROVED    C     marked for all applicable directives       kwon 4    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 50 Module Specific Information       NOTES  All terminals with the same  name are connected together  on the module  For example   L1 can be connected to any  terminal marked L1 1     When you daisy chain from a  group to another RTB  always  connect the daisy chain to the  terminal directly connected to  the supply wire  as shown     This wiring example shows a  single voltage source     Simplified schematic                                            Control Bus Interface                             Display    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    1756 ON8    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable f
108. a service through the tags  a value of  0 means the bit passed the service  and a value of 1 means the bit failed  the service  For example  if you perform a pulse test and the response  displays a 0 for a particular bit  the bit passed the test     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Power Supply Sizing Chart    Appendix C    Use the following chart to check the power your ControlLogix chassis is                                                                                     using   Slot Module  Current   5 1V Power    Current   Power   24   Current   Power    Number   Catalog   DC  mA  5 1V DC 24 VDC  Watts   3 3V DC 3 3V DC  Number  Watts  VDC  mA   mA   Watts   0 X5 1V  x 24V   X3 3V    1 x5 1V  x 24V   X3 3V    2 x5 1V  x 24V   X3 3V    3 x5 1V  x 24V   X3 3V    4 x5 1V  x 24V   x3 3V    5 x5 1V  x 24V   X3 3V    6 x5 1V  x 24V   X3 3V    7 X5 1V   x 24V   X3 3V    8 x5 1V  x 24V   X3 3V    9 X5 1V   x 24V   X3 3V    10 X5 1V  xX 24V   X3 3V   11 X5 1V  x 24V   x3 3V    12 x5 1V  x 24V   X3 3V    13 x5 1V  x 24V   X 3 3V   14 X5 1V  x 24V   X3 3V   15 X5 1V  xX 24V   X3 3V   16 X5 1V  xX 24V   X 3 3V    TOTALS mA W  1  mA W  2  mA W  3   This number This This number  cannot exceed  number cannot  e 10000mA for cannot exceed  1756 PA72 PB72 exceed 4000mA  e 13000mA for 2800mA  1756 PA75 PB75  These three wattage values  1  2  3   added together  cannot exceed   e 70W   40  C   For 1756 PA72 PB72  Series A  55W   60  C   For 1756 PA72 PB72  Series A  e 75W   40   60 
109. a signal  A larger filter value  affects the length of delay times for signals from these modules     For an example of how to set filter times  see page  6 13   or diagnostic input  modules and page 6 14   or diagnostic output modules     Isolated and Non Isolated Varieties of Modules    ControlLogix diagnostic input modules provide isolated or non isolated  wiring options  Some applications require power for the I O circuits to  originate on separate  isolated  power sources  Because these conditions  require separate commons for each channel  some input modules utilize  individual isolation  or point to point isolation     Other types of isolation available with ControlLogix diagnostic input  modules are channel to channel isolation and no isolation  Your specific  application will determine what type of isolation is necessary and which  input module to use     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    4 12 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Multiple Point Densities    ControlLogix diagnostic input modules use either 8  16  or 32 point  densities for greater flexibility in your application     Open Wire Detection    Open Wire is used to make sure the field wiring is connected to the module   The field device must provide a minimum leakage current to function    properly     A leakage resistor must be placed across the contacts of an input device    See each module   s specifications  listed in Chapter 6   for more de
110. able  RTB Screw Torque  NEMA  7 9 inch pounds  0 8 1Nm   RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB  1756 TBNH or TBSH    Environmental Conditions   Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F    Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F    Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing       Conductors Wire Size    22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum          Category 123  Screwdriver Width for RTB 5 16 inch  8mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous       PROVED         3 marked for all applicable directives       a wana    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 8 Module Specific Information       1756 IB16    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                 Feature Default value Page of description  Standard change of state OFF ON  Enabled 2 4  ON OFF  Enabled  Inp
111. able 1 B    Module Identification and Status Information       Module Identification     Description           Product Type Module   s product type  such as Digital 1 0 or  Analog 1 0 module  Catalog Code Module   s catalog number       Major Revision    Module   s major revision number       Minor Revision    Module   s minor revision number       Status    Module   s status  Returns the following information   e Controller ownership  if any   e Whether module has been configured  e Device Specific Status  such as        Self Test       Flash update in progress       Communications fault       Not owned  outputs in prog  mode        Internal fault  need flash update        Run mode       Program mode  output mods only     Minor recoverable fault  Minor unrecoverable fault  Major recoverable fault  Major unrecoverable fault       Vendor ID    Module manufacturer vendor  for example Allen Bradley       Serial Number    Module serial number       Length of ASCII Text String    Number of characters in module   s text string       ASCII Text String       Number of characters in module   s text string       Important  You must perform a WHO service to retrieve this information   For more information on how to retrieve module identification  information  see Appendix B     Preventing Electrostatic    Discharge    Removal and Insertion    Under Power    Chapter Summary and  What   s Next    What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules  1 5    This module is sensitive to electrostatic d
112. age  Rica 1 4W  2   TOV de  1 5  523K  24V do    5  14 3kQ 4  DC COM       40203 M  Simplified schematic Input  5V LED indicator  pile   t Control Bus    DC INPUT  Ce t i Interface Display  S     Y K ST01234567  f   FT 01234567 0  7 ofr J 2 o sT 89 0n2Bu5     8  ONDA f T     a K    FLT 8 9 10 1112131415  CK J      a GND DIAGNOSTIC  40203 M             Open wire 30346 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Module Specific Information 7 11       1756 IB16D Specifications       Number of Inputs    16  4 points common        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    150mA   5 1V dc  amp  3mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 0 84W                             Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  5 8W   60  C   Thermal Dissipation 19 78 BTU hr   On State Voltage Range 10 30V dc   Nominal Input Voltage 24V de   On State Current 2mA   10V de minimum  13mA   30V dc maximum   Maximum Off State Voltage 5V dc   Minimum Off State Current 1 5mA per point   Maximum Input Impedance   30V dc 2 31kQ       Input Delay Time       Off to on Programmable filter  Oms  1ms  amp  2ms  Hardware 1ms maximum plus filter time  On to off Programmable filter  Oms  1ms  9ms  amp  18ms  Hardware delay 4ms maximum plus filter time   Diagnostic Functions  Open wire Off state leakage current 1 2mA minimum  Time stamp of diagnostics     1ms  Change of state Software configurable  Time stamp on inputs     200us       Short Inrush Current    250mA peak  decaying to  lt 37  in 22ms  w
113. age Range is within the Motor starter range     Motor Starter uses 120V ac  1756 OA16I A operates in a 74     120V ac voltage range    Driving Motor Starters with ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules D 3    6  Confirm the inrush current per point     Inrush of motor starter     Line voltage   Inrush current   1225VA   120V ac   10 2Amps Inrush    The 1756 OA16I allows 20A Inrush current from above  specification at   60 C    7  Confirm the steady state point current of the module can drive the  motor starter     Sealed Line voltage   Steady state current   45 VA 120V ac    0 375A   50  C    Output point current can drive  2A     033ma X 10 C     2A   0 33A   1 67A   50  C    Above 30 C  output point derates to 033mA   C  point derating     The 1756 OA16I A output point current  1 67A  can drive the  motor starter  0 375A    50  C    8  Confirm the 1756 OA16I A total module current can drive 12 size 3  motor starters   50 C     Motor starter steady state current X 11 motor starters    375 X 12     45A   50  C    The output total module current can drive  5A     033ma X 10  C     5A   0 33A   4 67A   50 C    Above 30 C total output current derates to  033mA  C  Module  derating     The 1756 OA 16I A total output current  4 67A  can drive the 12  motor starters  4 5A    50  C    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    A  Agency Certification  Class I Division 2  UL  CSA   FM and CE 1 1  3 7  3 8  4 8    C  CE Certification 1 1  3 8  4 8  Change of State  Diagnostic change of state 4 1
114. ail i  Choose the state of outputs after Uei va      Leave outputs in Program Mode state  C Change outputs to Fault Mode state          a communications failure here          lt  Back   Next  gt    Finish  gt  gt    Help      Latching here       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 15       Editing Configuration After you have set configuration for a module  you can review and change  your choices  You can change configuration data and download it to the  controller while online  This is called dynamic reconfiguration     Your freedom to change some configurable features  though  depends on  whether the controller is in Remote Run Mode or Program Mode     Important  Although you can change configuration while online  you must  go offline to add or delete modules from the project     The editing process begins on the main page of RSLogix 5000         RSLogix 5000   User_doc  File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help    Forces Disabled w Exe  Driver  AB_DF1 1    H Ama Hoo  gt        gt    user ABK TimeriCounter_ K npuOuipu A                                      E Controller User_doc  Controller Tags   3 Controller Fault Handler  E Power Loss Handler      Tasks    a  MainTask   3 88 MainProgram   Program Tags    E  MainRoutine   GI Unscheduled Programs     Data Types   i User Defined    4  Predefined       Module Defined   E 1 0 Configuration                                                                   
115. al 1 0 Operation Within the  ControlLogix System    This chapter describes how digital I O modules work within the  ControlLogix system  The following table describes what this chapter  contains and its location     For information about  See page   Ownership   Using RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000  Direct Connections   Input Module Operation   Input Modules in a Local Chassis  Requested Packet Interval  RPI    Change of State  COS    Input Modules in a Remote Chassis  Output Module Operation   Output Modules in a Local Chassis  Output Modules in a Remote Chassis  Listen Only Mode   Multiple Owners of Input Modules  Configuration Changes in an Input Module  with Multiple Owners   Rack Connections   Suggestions for Rack Connection Usage  Chapter Summary and What   s Next                                                             Every I O module in the ControlLogix system must be owned by a  Logix5550 Controller  This owner controller stores configuration data for  every module that it owns and can be local or remote in regard to the I O  module   s position  The owner sends the I O module configuration data to  define the module   s behavior and begin operation with the control system   Each ControlLogix I O module must continuously maintain communication  with its owner to operate normally     Typically  each module in the system will have only 1 owner  Input modules  can have more than 1 owner  Output modules  however  are limited to a    single owner     For more information o
116. all       Interface module  IFM     A module that uses prewired cable to connect wiring to  an I O module       Listen only connection    An 1 0 connection where another controller owns   provides the configuration and data for the module       Major revision    A module revision that is updated any time there is a  functional change to the module       Minor revision    A module revision that is updated any time there is a  change to the module that does not affect its function or  interface       Multicast    Data transmissions which reach a specific group of one  or more destinations       Multiple owners    A configuration set up where multiple owner controllers  use exactly the same configuration information to  simultaneously own an input module       Network update time     NUT     The smallest repetitive time interval in which the data  can be sent on a ControlNet network  The NUT ranges  from 2ms to 100ms       Owner controller    The controller that creates and stores the primary  configuration and communication connection to a module       Program Mode    Controller program is not executing    Inputs are still actively producing data    Outputs are not actively controlled and go to their  configured program mode       Rack connection    An 1 0 connection where the 1756 CNB module collects  digital 1 0 words into a rack image to conserve ControlNet  connections and bandwidth       Rack optimization    A communications format in which the 1756 CNB  module collects al
117. als   Failure to observe this caution may cause personal injury    The RTB is designed to support Removal and Insertion Under  Power  RIUP   However  when you remove or insert an RTB  with field side power applied  unintended machine motion or  loss of process control can occur  Exercise extreme caution  when using this feature  It is recommended that field side power  be removed before installing the RTB onto the module     Before installing the RTB  make certain     field side wiring of the RTB has been completed   the RTB housing is snapped into place on the RTB   the RTB housing door is closed    the locking tab at the top of the module is unlocked     1  Align the top  bottom and left side guides of the RTB with the guides on  the module                 Top guide          Bottom guide    Left side guides    20853 M    2  Press quickly and evenly to seat the RTB on the module until the latches  snap into place              Locking tab              y       iii    ut    T          20854 M    3  Slide the locking tab down to lock the RTB onto the module     Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 5 9    Removing the Removable If you need to remove the module from the chassis  you must first remove  Terminal Block the RTB from the module     ATTENTION  Shock hazard exists  If the RTB is  removed from the module while the field side power is  applied  the module will be electrically live  Do not  touch the RTB   s terminals  Failure to observe this  caution may cause personal i
118. and module to  establish communications without the controller sending any configuration  data  In this instance  another controller owns the module being listened to     Important  In the Listen Only mode  controllers will continue to receive  data multicast from the I O module as long as the connection  between the owner and I O module is maintained     If the connection between owner and module is broken  the  module stops multicasting data and connections to all     Listening controllers    are also broken     Digital 1 0 Operation Within the ControlLogix System 2 11       Multiple Owners  of Input Modules    Initial Configuration    Because    Listening controllers    lose their connections to modules when  communications with the owner stop  the ControlLogix system will allow  you to define more than one owner for input modules     Important  Only input modules can have multiple owners  If multiple  owners are connected to the same input module  they must  maintain identical configuration for that module     In the example below  Controller A and Controller B have both been  configured to be the owner of the input module     Multiple Owners with Identical Configuration Data          Input Module  Configuration  Data  XXXXX  XXXXX  XXXXX              gt  Controller A    Input      Controller B  e    Initial Configuration                                                                                                                                                 3 Input 
119. ange to the state configured  for the program mode     For example  if an output module is configured so that the state    of the outputs turn off during program mode  whenever that  module is inhibited  the outputs will turn off     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    4 14 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Output Data Echo    When a processor sends an output command out to the ControlLogix  system  the diagnostic output module that is targeted for that command will  return the commanded state of the output to the system to verify the module  received the command and will try to execute it     Other devices can use this broadcast signal to determine the desired state of  the output without having to interrogate the owner controller     This feature cannot relay to the system that the field side device connected  to the output module has executed the command  If your application  requires a more detailed response than only acknowledging the receipt of a  command  see the Field Side Output Verify feature  defined later in   this chapter     Field Wiring Options    As with diagnostic input modules  ControlLogix diagnostic output modules  provide isolated or non isolated wiring options  I O modules provide  point to point  group to group  or channel to channel wiring isolation     Your specific application determines what type of isolation is necessary and  which output module to use     Important  Although some Cont
120. application determines  what type of isolation is necessary and which input module to use     Multiple Point Densities    ControlLogix input modules use either 8  16  or 32 point densities for  greater flexibility in your application     The following features are common to all ControlLogix standard digital  output modules     Configurable Point Level Output Fault States    Individual outputs can be independently configured to unique fault states   either ON  OFF or Last State in case of a communications failure or  program mode     Important  Whenever you inhibit an output module  it enters the program  mode and all outputs change to the state configured for the  program mode     For example  if an output module is configured so that the state    of the outputs turn off during program mode  whenever that  module is inhibited  the outputs will turn off     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    3 10 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Output Data Echo    When a processor sends an output command out to the ControlLogix  system  the output module that is targeted for that command will return the  commanded state of the output to the system to verify the module received  the command and will try to execute it     Other devices can use this broadcast signal to determine the desired state of  the output without having to interrogate the owner controller     This feature cannot relay to the system that the field side device c
121. are specific to various modules  The following table describes  what this chapter contains and its location              For information about  See page   Determining Diagnostic Input Module 4 1  Compatibility   Determining Diagnostic Output Module  Compatibility   Using Features Common to ControlLogix 4 3    Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Modules  Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Input          Modules  Using Features Specific to Diagnostic  Output Modules       Fault and Status Reporting Between Input  Modules and Controllers   Fault and Status Reporting Between Output  Modules and Controller    Chapter Summary and What   s Next             ControlLogix digital input modules interface to sensing devices and detect  whether they are ON or OFF     ControlLogix input modules convert ac or dc ON OFF signals from user  devices to appropriate logic level for use within the processor  Typical input  devices include     proximity switches  limit switches  selector switches  float switches  pushbutton switches    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    4 2 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features       2 For more information        Determining Diagnostic Output  Module Compatibility    a For more information       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    When designing a system using ControlLogix input modules  you must  consider     the voltage necessary for your application   whether you need a solid state device   current leakage   if your application should use sinking or sou
122. ata   scheduled output data   owner    controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value   Module returns fuse blown status with the value of the system clock   from its local chassis  when the fuse was either blown or reset    Full diagnostics   scheduled output data   owner controller sends the  module output data and a CST timestamp value  Module returns  diagnostic data and a timestamp of diagnostics    Rack optimization   owner controller sends all digital output words to  the remote chassis as a single rack image    These additional Communications Format choices are used by controllers  that want to listen to an output module but not own it  The choices have the  same definition as those above     Listen only   output data   Listen only   CST timestamped fuse data   output data  Listen only   full diagnostics   output data   Listen only   rack optimization    For example  the screen below shows the choices available when you are  configuring a 1756 OA8 module in a local chassis        Name   Lre Slot  fi     Description       m   Comm Format  OuptDaa O O OOOO  Listen Only   Output Data   Revision  Output Data       Scheduled Output Data    Important  Once the module is created  the communications format cannot    be changed  The module must be deleted and recreated     Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules    The following table lists the Communications Formats available on each  module     Table 6 A  Communications Formats    6 9          Mo
123. ation 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs    and  Schedule Outputs sc 06 cys havea e hea dated hawt 3 5  Producer Consumer Model  a0  2442s    Se ete ens 3 7  LED Status Information a4 2 0425 2744 geebenss Oeil keaes 3 7  Full Class I Division 2 Compliance                      3 8  CE CSA UL FM Agency Approvals                 00  3 8  Using Features Specific to Standard Input Modules            3 8  Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time     3 8  Software Configurable Filter Times                     3 8  Isolated and Non Isolated Varieties of Modules            3 9  Multiple Point Densities                     0 000000 3 9  Using Features Specific to Standard Output Modules           3 9  Configurable Point Level Output Fault States              3 9  O  tp  t Data Echos own sky eww 2    Ose tea Oe see 3 10  Field Wiring Options              0 00    ee ee eee eee 3 10  Multiple Point Densities                   0 00000 0005 3 10  FUSIN Ste OO A et hd te a Ee pal he it LA ee 3 11  Field Power Loss Detection                    0000 5 3 13  Diagnostic Latch of Information                       3 13  Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules  and Controllers 22 esere tur oa cee bee Rete wees ee eR 3 14  Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules  and  Controller    2 2   sessed eae eaten ee SES Ae eee ae 3 15  Chapter Summary and What   s Next                  00   3 16  Chapter 4  What This Chapter Contains         
124. ault type with  RSLogix 5000 8 5  Diagnostic modules 4 3  4 9  Diagnostic output modules 4 13  Standard modules 3 3  Field Power Loss Detection  1756 IA8D module 4 12  1756 OA8E module 3 13  Field Power Loss Word  Diagnostic input modules 4 20   4 21  Diagnostic output modules 4 22   4 23  Standard output modules 3 15   3 16  FM Certification 1 1  3 8  4 8  Fuse Blown Word  Diagnostic output modules 4 22   4 23  Standard output modules 3 15   3 16  Fusing  Diagnostic output modules 4 15   4 19  Recommended fuses for  diagnostic output modules 4 15  Recommended fuses for standard  output modules 3 11  Resetting a fuse in ladder logic  B 12  Resetting electronic fuse in  RSLogix 5000 6 21  Standard output modules 3 10    H  Housing  Choosing the extended depth  housing 5 6    l  Inhibit  Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 10  Preventing communication  between I O module and  controller P 3  Input Module Filters  Configuring in RSLogix 5000  3 8  4 11  6 12  6 13  Interface Module  IFM  P 3  1 2    K  Keying 5 2    L  Ladder Logic  Creating new tag B 3  Message configuration B 4  Message instructions B 1  B 3  Message number of elements B 5  Message object attributes B 5  Message object ID B 5  Message object types B 5  Message service codes B 5  Module services B 2  Performing the pulse test B 12  Resetting a fuse B 12  Resetting latched diagnostics  B 12  Latched Diagnostics  Resetting with ladder logic B 12  Latching  Diagnostic latching 3 13  4 8  LED Status Indicators 3 7  4 7  Inp
125. call your local Rockwell Automation representative     Your Questions or Comments on this Manual    If you find a problem with this manual  please notify us of it on the enclosed  Publication Problem Report     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    What Are ControlLogix Digital I   0 Modules     Digital 1 0 Operation Within  the ControlLogix System    ControlLogix Standard Digital  1 0 Module Features    Table of Contents    Chapter 1  What This Chapter Contains             00 0 0    020 e eee 1 1  What are ControlLogix Digital I O Modules                  1 1  Using an I O Module in the ControlLogix System             1 2  Features of the ControlLogix Digital I O Modules          1 3  Using Module Identification and Status Information           1 4  Preventing Electrostatic Discharge                  00000  1 5  Removal and Insertion Under Power                   0 0  1 5  Chapter Summary and What   s Next                  0 000  1 5  Chapter 2  What This Chapter Contains             0 0 0 0    2 eee eee 2 1  Ownership  oes eae oS RV ORs ONS Goce oats eS wale aa eae s 2 1  Using RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000                   0  2 2  Direct Conhectons 5 4 0 ine ibys a haat whad tere ye ew hector 2 3  Input Module Operation   4 3 00245   lee a eas 2 3  Input Modules in a Local Chassis                    00005 2 4  Requested Packet Interval  RPD                   005  2 4  Change of State COS    202 24s0igeobebid ton renee 2 4  Input Modules in a Remote Chassis                   
126. category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines      CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 30 Module Specific Information       1756 OA8D    Configurable features  The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                                   Feature Default value Page of description   Diagnostic latch Enabled 4 8   No load Enabled  Output verify Enabled  Pulse test Performed at user   s request  Loss of field power Enabled  Communications format Full diagnostics   output data  Program mode Off  Program to fault transition Disabled  Fault mode Off 6 11             Wiring example  Use the following example to wire your module                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       7 2a  M used ee  ie  L2 0  L1 0   J       OUT 0  NOTES  All terminals with the same name are   
127. cation     when product or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous       PROVED        3 marked for all applicable directives       a wan os    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 6 Module Specific Information       1756 IA8D    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                             Feature Default value Page of description   Standard change of state OFF ON  Enabled 2 4  ON OFF  Enabled   Input filter time OFF ON  1ms 3 8  ON OFF  9ms   Diagnostic latch Enabled   Open wire detection Enabled   Field power loss detection Enabled   Diagnostic change of state Enabled   Communications format Full diagnostics   input data             Wiring example  Use the following example to wire your module                                                                                                                                                                                               
128. cation 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    5 6 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module       Choosing the Extended Depth  Housing    Maximum Area   336mm     There are two housing options you must consider when wiring your  ControlLogix digital I O module     When you order an RTB for your I O module  you receive a standard depth  housing with the RTB  If your application uses heavy gauge wiring  you can  order an extended depth housing  This housing does not come with an RTB     You can use one of the following housings     e standard depth housing   1756 TBNH   TBSH   TBCH  or  TBS6H   included with your RTB order    e extended depth housing   1756 TBE  must be ordered separately    The graphic below shows the difference  in terms of capacity  between the  housing options     Important  The housings shown are used with a spring clamp RTB  but the  capacity for each remains the same regardless of RTB type     Standard Depth Housing Extended Depth Housing       Maximum Area   628mm        36   18AWG wires  23   14AWG wires    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    40   14AWG wires                       7   VA  TILL                                    Ge             ty  Yi                  L  30484 M    Important  The housings maintain the following maximum areas       standard depth housing maximum area   336mm         extended depth housing maximum area   628mm     Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 5 7    Suggestions for Using the Extended Depth Housing      Consider the following r
129. cator          G gt  AC OUTPUT       ST 01234567 8  FUSE E 0             ST 8 9 10111213 1415  FUSE E                   40458 M    Module Specific Information 7 25       1756 0A16 Specifications       Number of Outputs    16  8 points common        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    400mA   5 1V dc  amp  2mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 2 09W                             Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  6 5W   60  C  Thermal Dissipation 22 17 BTU hr  Output Voltage Range 74 265V ac  47 63Hz  Output Current Rating  Per Point 0 5A maximum   60  C  Per Group 2A maximum   60  C  Per Module 4A maximum   60  C  Surge Current  Per Point 8A for 43ms each  repeatable every 2s   60  C  Per Group 15A for 43ms each  repeatable every 2s   60  C  Minimum Load Current 10mA per point  Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 5V   0 5A  5 7V   load current  lt  50mA  Maximum Off State Leakage Current 3mA per point       Commutating Voltage    4V us for loads gt 50mA  0 2V us for loads lt 50mA              Output Delay Time  Off to on 9 3ms   60Hz  11ms   50Hz  On to off 9 3ms   60Hz  11ms   50Hz  Diagnostic Functions  Fuse Blown 1 Fuse and indicator group  Time stamp of diagnostics     1ms  Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum  reference to the CST       Configurable Fault States per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Configurable States in Program Mode per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default   
130. cenario  When the configuration data is changed in one of    the owners  for example  Controller A  and sent to the module  that  configuration data is accepted as the new configuration for the module   Controller B will continue to listen  unaware that any changes have been    made in the module   s behavior     Multiple Owners with Changed Configuration Data in a Single Controller                 gt  Controller A _ Input   E Controller B 9       nitial Configuration                                                                                                                                        Input Module  Configuration  Data  XXXXX  XXXXX  XXXXX                a    al ofS         o EmA Con B  O  OJ   O  7  I                    Controller B is unaware of changes made by Controller A             41057    Important  To prevent other owners from receiving potentially erroneous  data  as described above  the following steps must be followed  when changing a module   s configuration in a multiple owner    scenario when online     1  Make the appropriate configuration data changes in the software and    apply them     When you apply new configuration data  the software alerts you to  inhibit the module  recommended if your are using a multiple  controller system  or perform a bumpless reconfiguration   recommended if your are using a single controller system   For a  complete explanation of a bumpless reconfiguration  see page P 2      2  Repeat step 1 for all owner control
131. ch                                                                                         1 Select the local communications module  2 Click on the right mouse button and  select New Module       Type  1756 CNBR 1756 ControlNet Bridge  Redundant Media   Vendor  Allen Bradley   Parent  pen module   Noge   1 El  IMPORTANT  Be aware of the two  nAi   Description  ae Size   10   Communications Format choices     m  available for 1756  CNB modules      Comm Format   Rack Optimization   oe    For more information on the  differences between Rack  Optimization and Listen Only Rack  Optimization  see chaptal 2         Listen Only   Rack Optimization    Rack Optimization        ompatible Module    Cancel    lt Back   Next gt     Finish  gt  gt   Help         For more information on the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface modules       For more information     see the ControlLogix ControlNet Interface Installation Instructions   publication 1756 5 32     Now you can configure the remote I O modules by adding them to the  remote communications module  Follow the same procedures as you do for  configuring local I O modules as detailed earlier in this chapter     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    6 20 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules       Input Online Services    Reset Latched Diagnostics here    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Diagnostic input modules have an additional pages of diagnostic services   The following diagnostic    e Reset Latched Diagnostics    is 
132. choices available when you are  configuring a 1756 IA16I module in a local chassis     Name   Conveyor Slot    4  4    Description   z    Comm Format   Input Data      CST Timestamped Input Data  Input Data    Listen Only   CST Timestamped Input Data  Listen Only   Input Data              Revision        Important  Once the module is created  the communications format cannot    be changed  The module must be deleted and recreated     Output Module Formats    The following are possible Communications Format choices for  output modules     As with input modules  the number and type of choices varies depending on  which output module you are using and whether it is in a local or remote  chassis     The following are possible Communications Format choices for output  modules     output data   owner controller sends the module only output data    CST timestamped fuse data   output data   owner controller sends the  module only output data  Module returns fuse blown status with the  value of the system clock  from its local chassis  when the fuse was  either blown or reset    Full diagnostic   output data   owner controller sends the module only  output data  Module returns diagnostic data and a timestamp of    diagnostics    Scheduled output data   owner controller sends the module output data  and a CST timestamp value    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    6 8 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    e CST timestamped fuse d
133. d   2  Pulse Test fails  2  No Load bit is set  2  Output is shorted   3  Pulse Test passes  to DC   3  No power to  the module   1  Output Data Echo returns the state of 1  Output Data Echo returns the state of Hardware point  the output as ON       a Ee Bia damage     2  Output Verify  sets a bit  Tope BSE AlS    1  The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions  The protection is based on a thermal cutout principal   In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel  that channel will limit the current within milliseconds after its thermal cutout temperature has been reached  Other  channels could produce a false error on the output verify fault signal due to the supply dropping below the minimum detect level of 19 2V dc  The output channels that are affected  by this phenomena will continue to operate as directed by the module master  CPU  Bridge  etc   What this means is that the output verify fault signals of the other channels should  be checked and reset if a short circuit on one channel occurs    2  Itis not possible to create a fuse blown fault in the OFF state  If a short circuit occurs  the output point is turned OFF and the fault appears in the OFF state until that point is reset    3  When pulse test is executed  it is normal operation to see a momentary pulsation on the module display    4  The output cannot turn ON due to hardware point damage    5  Depending on the cha
134. d   chassis communication   out    OK Steady red light The module must be Replace the module   replaced    1 0 State Yellow The output is active  None   1 0 Fuse Red A short overload fault has   Check wiring for short  occurred for this point  overload    1 0 Fault Red A fault has occurred for Check this point at the  this point  controller                 Troubleshooting Your Module 8 3       The following LED indicators are used with output modules     1756 0A16              2 AC OUTPUT     T01234567  USE E  ST 8 9 10111213 1415  FUSE E       40458 M    1756 0A8D            gt  AC OUTPUT    ST012345670  K    FT 01234567       DIAGNOSTIC 40461 M    1756 0B16E              3 DC OUTPUT    ST 01234567  FUSE E 7  ST 8 9 101112131415       FUSE E    ELECTRONICALLY FUSED 40464 M    1756 0B8  0C8  OH8I      gt  DC OUTPUT    ST 01234567 g  K       40466 M       1756 0A16l                 gt  AC OUTPUT    ST 012345670    ST 8 9 101112131415      40459 M    1756 0A8E                 gt  AC OUTPUT     T01234567 Q    FUSE0 1234567 K    ELECTRONICALLY FUSED MN    1756 0B161              4 DC OUTPUT     T01234567 9       ST 8 9 10111213 1415       40457 M    1756 OB8EI           2 DC OUTPUT     T012345670    FUSE 01234567 K    ELECTRONICALLY FUSED 40467 M       1756 0X8l              gt  RELAY OUTPUT    ST 012345670       40456 M          1756 0A8  ON8      gt  AC OUTPUT    ST01234567 9  K       40460 M       1756 0B16D     3 DC OUTPUT     T01234567 d  nrorazase7 H       ST 8 9 10111213 1
135. de  Channel   Attribute Elements  Number   Retrieve Obtain module   s 1 77 1 N A N A 0 CST_Information All  CST CST status and SINT  informatio   check if module is  n synchronized with  the CST   Retrieve Obtain module   s 1 1 1 N A N A 0 WHO_Information All  Device general status SINT 48   Informatio such as  n  WHO  ownership  health  and identity   Reset the Reset module to 5 1 1 N A N A 0 N A All  Module    out of the box  condition    and go  through a  power up   Reset Clear any latched 4b 1d   input 1 N A Enable_3 4 N A 1756 0A8  Latched faults except Fuse modules 2_Points D  0B16D   Diagnostic Blown le  DINT OAS8E   output IA8D   modules IB16D only  Reset Reset blown fuse 4d le  1 N A Enable_3 4 Results_32_   1756 0A8  Electronic   status for a point output 2_Points Points D  OB16D  Fuse module DINT DINT  Pulse Test   Performs a pulse 4c le  1 N A Pulse_Test_ 10 Results_32_   1756 0A8  test on the point  output Parameters Points D  OB16D  Only test one point module SINT 10  DINT  at a time   Enable Enable the 1d 1 0 1756 IA8D  Diagnostic   diagnostic change   IB16D  COS of state feature on  module  Enable Enable the open 4b 1d 1 0 1756 IA8D  Open Wire   wire detection on   IB16D  Detection module  1                               Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999                                     B 6 Using Ladder Logic  Some services require multiple parameters tags in the source and  destination fields  e g  Pulse Test    These services use copy instructions to mo
136. defined    GG ModuleDefined _       2G 10 Configuration  i    11175648161 Switch    A   2  1756 0A8D Light    Warning icon when a  communications fault occurs  or if the module is inhibited                Tocai TI Daad  o am  fomne   End    ag    E  1 0 Configuration             yi          4  A   1  1756 1B 161 Switch      A  2  1756 0A8D Light         E Module Properties   Local 3  1756 DA8D 2 1  xi    General   Connection Module Info   Configuration   Diagnostics   Pulse Test   Backplane         Identification  Vendor     Product Type   Product Code   Revision    Serial Number     Product Name     r Status    Major Fault  EEPROM fault  None     16 0850  unknown     0  unknown   0  unknown Minor Fault    0  unknown  0 0    0    Internal State     Configured  No  Owned  No  Module Identity  Mismatch       Timer Hardware   Timer Sync ed        Status line provides information on  the module   s fault and on the  connection to the module    Status  Validating    m Coordinated System Time  CST           Refresh   Reset Module         Notification in Tag Editor                                             A fault has occurred for any point that                      lists the number 1 in the Fault line                            Controller Tags   Light_switch controller  BES  Scope   Light_switch contrall Z  Filter   Show All TA Sot  Tag Name     Local  thant    AB 1756_DI   l Locat1 1 tad AB 1756_DI   Hilocat2C os AB 1756_DC  F Locat21 om AB 1756_DC  a  9808_0800_0800_0800_0800_8
137. dule  Available Communications Formats        1756 1A16   IA16l  IM16l  Input data    IB16l   IB16   IB32   IC16    CST timestamped input data    IH16l   IN16 Rack optimization   Listen only   input data   Listen only   CST timestamped input data  Listen only   rack optimization          1756 IA8D   IB16D Full diagnostics   input data   Listen only   full diagnostics   input data  1756 0A16   OA8E  CST timestamped fuse data   output data   OB16E   OB8EI CST timestamped fuse data   scheduled output data    Listen only   CST timestamped fuse data   output data       1756 OA16Il   OA8   OB16I    Output data    0B32   OB8   0C8   OH8I    Scheduled output data    ON8   OW16l   OX8I Rack optimization   Listen only   output data  Listen only   rack optimization       1756 OA8D   OB16D Full diagnostics   output data  Full diagnostics   scheduled output data  Listen only   full diagnostics   output data          Electronic Keying    When you write configuration for a module you can choose how specific  the keying must be when a module is inserted into a slot in the chassis     For example  the screen below shows the choices available when you are  configuring a 1756 OA8 module     Description            Comm Format   Output Data x   Revision  my fi 4 Electronic Keying   Compatible Module z     Disable Keying  Exact Match       For a detailed explanation about electronic keying options  see page 3 4      Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    6 10 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1
138. e  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm     stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 123  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch  8mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous    lt fm gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous     C     marked for all applicable directives       Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual     Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations   FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     wana       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 10       Module Specific Information    1756 IB16D    Configurable features  The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the    default value and the page of the feature   s description                       Feature Default value Page of description  Standard change of state OFF ON  Enabled 2 4  ON OFF  Enabled  Input filter time OFF ON  1ms 3 8  ON OFF  1ms  Diagnostic latch Enabled  Open wire detection Enabled 4 12  Diagnostic change of state Enabled 4 13       Communications format       Full diagnostics   input data          Wiring 
139. e  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Fusing    Not protected   Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs  See  publication 1492 2 12        Reverse Polarity Protection    None   If module is wired incorrectly  outputs may be damaged                                Isolation Voltage  Group to group 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  Cage clamp  4 4 inch pounds  0 4Nm  maximum  RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB  1756 TBCH or TBS6H    Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm     stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 123  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch  3 2mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous      lt fm gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous       appROVED    marked for all applicable directives       a won os    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Div
140. e  Off to on 1ms maximum  On to off 5ms maximum  Diagnostic Functions   Short trip  gt 4 5A for 500us maximum  Output ON  then short    gt 4 5A for 1 5ms maximum  Output ON into short   Time stamp of diagnostics     1ms  Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum  reference to the CST       Configurable Fault States per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Configurable States in Program Mode per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Fusing    Electronically fused per point       Reverse Polarity Protection    None   If module is wired incorrectly  outputs may be damaged        Isolation Voltage  Channel to channel    100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between channels                             User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  Cage clamp  4 4 inch pounds  0 4Nm  maximum  RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB  1756 TBCH or TBS6H    Environmental Conditions   Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F    Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F    Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded    3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 423   Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch  3 2mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous    lt  gt
141. e Features                    A 11  Point by Point Configurable Features                   A 12  Downloading New Configuration Data From the Tag Editor    A 13  Sample Series of Tags slog een che SNe A 14  Appendix B  Using Message Instructions         ssusuuanunn ee eee eee ee B 1  Processing Real Time Control and Module Services        B 2  One Service Performed Per Instruction                   B 2  Creating a New Taps co occu ube aE E sa as B 3  Enter Message Configuration                     005  B 4  Using Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs         B 9  Resetting a Fuse  Performing the Pulse Test  and Resetting Latched Diagnostics                     B 12  Performing a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification  ANd SUAS tro wine Vande ead onde ht ec aaie tie endow    B 13  Using Tags in Ladder Logic                   0 000   B 16    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    vi    Power Supply Sizing Chart    Driving Motor Starters  with ControlLogix Digital  1 0 Modules    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Appendix C    Appendix D    Determining the Maximum Number of Motor Starters    What This Chapter Contains    What are ControlLogix  Digital 1 0 Modules     Chapter 1    What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules     This chapter describes the ControlLogix digital modules and what you must  know and do before you begin to use them  The following table describes  what this chapter contains and its location                    For information about  See page   What are 
142. e User selectable  100us minimum 750ms maximum   Reverse Polarity Protection Yes  Isolation Voltage  Group to group 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  NEMA  7 9 inch pounds  0 8 1Nm   RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB  1756 TBNH or TBSH    Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 123  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch  8mm  maximum  Agency Certification D   when product or packaging is marked    e Class   Div 2 Hazardous    lt fm gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous     C     marked for all applicable directives          Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       a Wn    CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations   FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 18 Module Specific Information       1756 IH1
143. e terminal block from the module   removing the module from the chassis    Move on to Chapter  6 to learn how to configure your module     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    What This Chapter Contains    Configuring Your 1 0 Module    Chapter 6    Configuring Your ControlLogix    Digital 1 0 Modules    This chapter describes why you must configure your ControlLogix digital  T O modules and how to configure them for use in the ControlLogix system   The following table describes what this chapter contains and its location        For information about     See page              Configuring Your 1 0 Module          Overview of the Configuration Process       Creating a New Module       Using the Default Configuration       Altering the Default Configuration       Configuring a Standard Input Module       Configuring a Standard Output Module       Configuring a Diagnostic Input Module       Configuring a Diagnostic Output Module       Editing Configuration       Reconfiguring Module Parameters in  Remote Run Mode          Reconfiguring Module Parameters in  Program Mode       Configuring 1 0 Modules in a Remote  Chassis       Input Online Services       Output Online Services       Viewing and Changing Module Tags       Chapter Summary and What   s Next          You must configure your module upon installation  The module will not    work until it has been configured     Important  This chapter focuses on configuring I O modules in a local  chassis  To configure I O modules in a
144. e that the output  module will receive data at least as often as the specified RPI     Output Module in Remote Chassis with Data Coming At Least as Often as RPI                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         TR   AN A AN  Owner controller ControlNet Bridge module ControlNet Bridge module   Output module  j y  B  8 y 7   zP fF        HI  L  9   9       bo Data sent from owner 5 Immediate backplane  5 at module   s RPI only 2 Q transfers to module  Pi 7  I I      S      S   Output data at least as often as RPI  ControlNet 40947       The    reserved    spot on the network and when the controller sends the  output data are asynchronous to each other  This means there are Best and  Worst Case scenarios as to when the owner controller will receive updated  channel data from the module in a networked chassis     Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario    In the Best Case scenario  the owner controller sends the output data just  before the    reserved    network slot is made available  In this case  the  remotely located output module receives the data almost immediately     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    2 10 Digital 1 0 Operation Within the ControlLogix System       Listen Only Mode    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999
145. eatures this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                    Feature Default value Page of description  Communications format Output data  Program mode Off 6 11  Program to fault transition Disabled 6 11  Fault mode Off 6 11             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module     Daisy chain to other RTBs                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    L1 0 ie  ic OUT 0  e E  L1 0 HOD   4 OUT 1  ele  L1 0 HOD   4 OUT 2  Group 0 IG  I Group 0  L1 0 IED  I OUT 3  Selo  L1 0  LL   f Not used  1 1     EIES  our 4   14  L1 1  SL    H  OUT 5  LD ep  Group 1 L1 1 HE  If OUT 6 Group 1       D  ut    EIE  our 7  2 19 pe  11 1     HED IEB   not used  CY  4u1d4 M  Surge Current Chart LED indicator  L10 Surge   g 3 20A    gt  AC OUTPUT  3  45 ST01234567 9  z K  out o 3  2A   6  0 43  41161 M Time i 40852 M 20978 M    Module Specific Information 7 51       1756 ON8 Specifications       Number of Outputs    8  4 points common        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    200mA   5 1V dc  amp  2mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 1 07W                 Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  5 1W   60  C  Thermal Dissipation 17 39 BTU hr  Output Voltage Range 10 30V ac  current gt 50
146. echanical keying  RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB  1756 TBNH or TBSH   Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 423  Screwdriver Width for RTB 5 16 inch  8mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous    lt  gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous     appROVED    marked for all applicable directives       a won    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 32    Module Specific Information       1756 OA8E  Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description              Feature Default value Page of description  Loss of field power Enabled 3 13  Diagnostic latch Enabled 3 13       Communications format    CST timestamped fuse data    output data       
147. ecommendations when deciding to use an  extended depth housing on your I O module  It is recommended you use the  1756 TBE when     e using  gt 36 18AWG wires  e using  gt 23 14AWG wires    Cabinet Size Considerations When Using the Extended Depth Housing       When you use an extended depth housing  1756 TBE   the I O module  depth is increased  The diagram below shows the difference  in terms of  depth  between an I O module using a standard depth housing and one  using an extended depth housing                                                                                                                     lt  144 73mm a   5 698in   12 7mm       E 131 75mm        gt    0 5in      gt     lt      3 18mm  0 125in   5 187in   YN  H CO    J     lt     Rear Surface of    ControlLogix Chassis  Standard Depth Housing    Extended Depth Housing EREA  O   SEA l  7  i                 41682       Important  The depth from front of the module to the back of the chassis is  as follows         standard depth housing   147 91mm  5 823in         extended depth housing   157 43mm  6 198in     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    5 8 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module       Installing the Removable    Terminal Block    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Install the RTB onto the module to connect wiring     ATTENTION  Shock hazard exists  If the RTB is installed  onto the module while the field side power is applied  the RTB  will be electrically live  Do not touch the RTB   s termin
148. ectronically  fused  1756 0B161 7 None   Fused IFM is recommended   5x20mm SOC p n  to protect outputs 4A MQ2 4A   See publication 1492 2 12  Quick acting  1756 0B325 7 None   Fused IFM is recommended   5x20mm Littelfuse p n  to protect outputs 800mA SP001 1003 or   See publication 1492 2 12  Schurter p n  216 800  1756 0C  8   None   Fused IFM is recommended   5x20mm SOC p n  to protect outputs 4A MQ2 4A   See publication 1492 2 12  Quick acting  1756 OH8I   7 None   Fused IFM is recommended   5x20mm SOC p n  to protect outputs 4A MQ2 4A   See publication 1492 2 12  Quick acting  Relay   1756 OW16I    None   Fused IFM is recommended   5x20mm SOC p n  to protect outputs 6 3A MT 4 6 3A   See publication 1492 2 12  Medium lag  1756 0X817 None   Fused IFM is recommended   5x20mm SOC p n  to protect outputs 6 3A MT 4 6 3A   See publication 1492 2 12  Medium lag  1  For voltages above 132V ac  the Interface Modules  IFM  are not an acceptable means to provide external fusing  A rated terminal block for the intended  application must be used   2  Electronic protection is not intended to replace fuses  circuit breakers  or other code required wiring protection devices   3  The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions  The protection is based on    Non    a thermal cut out principle  In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel  that channel will limit the current within milliseconds af
149. efault value and the page of the feature   s description                    Feature Default value Page of description  Communications format CST timestamped fuse  data   output data  Program mode Off 6 11  Program to fault transition Disabled 6 11  Fault mode Off 6 11             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Daisy chain to                     2  out 1     TES IED  out o  OUT 3 i  Cl OUT 2  l lap  N D   roup OUT 5 i  IL      OUT 4  DIE  NOTES  When you daisy chain from a group to OUT 7 ee  IEB  out 6  other RTBs  always connect the daisy  chain to the terminal directly connected L1 0 ie  I   5     L2 0  to the source wire  as shown     H  out 9     IEB HEDI  our s  This wiring example shows a single Fi Pan  voltage source  pen D AU  Group    ouT 13     O E  D 1  our 15     ES EE  20 19  11 1     NEB MEBI   12 1  Cc    Daisy chain to  other RTBs other RTBs  Simplified schematic L1 0 Surge Current Chart  Control Bus yey w      Interface Ss   x  A   Fused per group Surge Per group         Display 20A  all 5 Si Per group  y S 2A  uote ud OUT 0 0 5A    W   D 0         Control Bus Interface sia Time 43ms Pree    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999       OUT 10    OUT 12    OUT 14          40175 M    LED indi
150. elow               V   Current flow Output Current flow with  with output ON Transistor output OFF           41681    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    4 16 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Diagnostic output modules list a minimum load current specification   1756 OA8D   10mA  amp  1756 OB16D   3mA   In the ON state  the  module must be connected to a load which will draw a minimum current  equal to these values     If a connected load is sized in accordance with the minimum load current  specification  diagnostic output modules are capable of sensing current  through the optoisolator and the load when the output point is OFF     For an example of how to set the No Load detection diagnostic  see    page 6 14       This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user  program in the event of a fault  For more information on these tags  see    Appendix  A      Field Side Output Verification    Field Side Output Verification informs the user that logic side instructions  that the module consumes are accurately represented on the power side of a  switching device  In other words  for each output point  this feature  confirms that the output is ON when it is commanded to be ON     The diagnostic output module can tell a controller that it received a  command and whether or not the field side device connected to the module  has executed the command  For example  in applications that need to verify  
151. equency 1 operation 3s  0 3Hz at rated load  maximum  Dissipation  Module    Thermal Dissipation 10 57 BTU hr Bounce Time 1 2ms  mean    Output Voltage Range 10 265V 47 63Hz 5 150V dc Expected Contact Life 300k cycles resistive 100k cycles inductive  Output Voltage Range 5 30V dc   2A resistive Power Rating  steady state   250W maximum for 125V ac resistive output                    load dependent  48V dc   0 5A resistive 480W maximum for 240V ac resistive output  125V dc   0 25A resistive 60W maximum for 30V dc resistive output  125V ac   2A resistive 24W maximum for 48V dc resistive output  240V ac   2A resistive 31W maximum for 125V dc resistive output   250VA maximum for 125V ac inductive output  480VA maximum for 240V ac inductive output  60VA maximum for 30V dc inductive output  24VA maximum for 48V dc inductive output  31VA maximum for 125V dc inductive output   Output Current Rating Resistive Environmental Conditions    at rating power  2A   5 30V dc Operating Temperature  0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   0 5A   48V dc Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   0 25V   125V dc Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  2A   125V ac  2A   240V ac  Inductive  2A steady state   5 30V dc  L R 7ms  0 5A steady state   48V dc  L R 7ms  0 25A steady state   125V dc  L R 7ms  2A steady state  15A make   125V ac    PF cos 0 0 4  2A steady state  15A make   240 V ac   PF cos 0 0 4   Maximum Off State OmA Fusing None   Fused IFM is recommended to protect   Leakage Current output
152. er Power  RIUP     All ControlLogix I O modules may be inserted and removed from the  chassis while power is applied  This feature allows greater availability of  the overall control system because  while the module is being removed or  inserted  there is no additional disruption to the rest of the controlled  process     Module Fault Reporting    ControlLogix digital I O modules provide both hardware and software  indication when a module fault has occurred  Each module   s LED fault  indicator and RSLogix 5000 will graphically display this fault and include a  fault message describing the nature of the fault     This feature allows you to determine how your module has been affected  and what action should be taken to resume normal operation     Fully Software Configurable    The software uses a custom  easily understood interface to write  configuration  All module features are enabled or disabled through the I O  configuration portion of RSLogix 5000     The user can also use the software to interrogate any module in the system  to retrieve serial number  revision information  catalog number  vendor    identification  error fault information  or diagnostic counters     By eliminating such tasks as setting hardware switches and jumpers  the  software makes module configuration easier and more reliable     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    3 4 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Electronic Keying    Instead of pla
153. es multicast fault status data    Between Output Modules to any owner listening controllers     and Controller POE     All output modules maintain a Module Fault Word  the highest level of fault    reporting  Some modules also use additional words to indicate fault  conditions  as shown on the next page     The following tags can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault  has occurred     e Module Fault Word   This word provides fault summary reporting  It   s  tag name is Fault  This word is available on all digital output modules     e Fuse Blown Word   This word indicates a point group fuse blown on  the module  It   s tag name is FuseBlown     For more information on fusing  see page    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    4 22 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    e Field Power Loss Word   This word indicates a loss of field power to a  point on the module  It   s tag name is FieldPwrLoss  This word is only  available on 1756 OA8D module     For more information on field power loss  see page    e No Load Word   This word indicates a loss of a load from a point on the  module  It   s tag name is NoLoad     For more information on no load conditions  see page 4 15      e Output Verify Word   This word indicates when an output is not  performing as commanded by the owner controller  It   s tag name is  Output Verify     For more information on output verify  see page 4 16     All words are 32 bit  although o
154. est fails  4  Pulse Test fails    1  Output Data Echo returns the state of 1  Output Data Echo returns the state of Hardware point  the output as ON  j oe ua a damage     2  Output Verify    bit is set  ARSE SOSETAN    1  Itis not possible to create a fuse blown fault in the OFF state  If a short circuit occurs  the output point is turned OFF and the fault appears in the OFF state until the point is reset    2  When pulse test is executed  it is normal operation to see a momentary pulsation on the module display    3  The output cannot turn ON due to hardware point damage    4  Depending on the characteristics of an applied short circuit  an output verify fault could be set until the short circuit is detected by the module and the output is turned OFF    5  During normal operating conditions  hardware damage should not be possible  An output shorted to L2 may temporarily cause a hardware point fault  See output shorted to L2 as  a possible cause    See Table 4 C for possible diagnostic faults on the 1756 OB16D module  Table 4 C  1756 0B16D Diagnostic Fault Table  Ladder Commands the Output to be ON  Ladder Commands the Output to be OFF  Possible Cause  of Fault   1  Output Data Echo returns the state of 1  Output Data Echo returns the state of Output is shorted  1 pit  s   2  Fuse Blown    bit is set  2  Pulse Test fails       1  Output Data Echo returns the state of 1  Output Data Echo returns the state of One of the following   the output as ON  the output as OFF  1  No Loa
155. estamping 3 6  4 6  Using timestamping P 4  1 1    T  Timestamping 6 6  6 7  Diagnostic Timestamp 4 8  For a sequence of events 3 5  4 5  Marking input data change with  relative time reference P 4  3 5   4 5  System timestamp 1 1  Used with scheduled outputs 3 6   4 6  6 8  B 9  Troubleshooting  Fault status 3 7  4 7  Fuse status 3 7  4 7  I O status 3 7  4 7  Module status 3 7  4 7  Module status indicators 1 3  3 7   4 7  8 1  8 2  Using RSLogix 5000 8 4  Types of ControlLogix I O Modules  1 2    U  UL Certification 1 1  3 8  4 8    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Ww    Wiring Connections    Choosing the extended depth  housing 5 6   Recommendations for wiring  RTB 5 4   Using the IFM P 3  1 2   Using the RTB P 3  1 2  5 2  5 3   Using the cage clamp RTB 5 3   Using the NEMA clamp RTB 5 3   Using the spring clamp RTB 5 3    Wiring Example    1756 IA16 module 7 2  1756 IA16I module 7 4  7 26  1756 IA8D module 7 6  1756 IB16 module 7 8  1756 IB16D module 7 10  1756 IB16I module 7 12  1756 IB32 module 7 14  1756 IC16 module 7 16    Wiring Example  continued     1756 IH16I module 7 18  1756 IM16I module 7 20  1756 IN16 module 7 22  1756 OA16 module 7 24  1756 OA16I module 7 26  1756 OA8 module 7 28  1756 OA8D module 7 30  1756 OA8E module 7 32  1756 OB16D module 7 34  1756 OB16E module 7 36  1756 OB 16I module 7 38  1756 OB32 module 7 40  1756 OB8 module 7 42  1756 OB8EI module 7 44  1756 OC8 module 7 46  1756 OH8I module 7 48  1756 
156. et by the User   O no fault  1 fault  NoLoad Input data No Load     Diagnostic which indicates the absence of a load  e g  the wire is   1 bit per group  disconnected from the module   This diagnostic only operates in the OFF  state   O no fault  1 fault  OutputVerifyFault Input data Output Verify     Diagnostic which indicates that the output has been     1 bit per point           commanded to the ON state but the output has not been verified to be ON   O no fault  1 fault  output is not ON        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Using Software Configuration Tags                Output Data Tag  Table A J  Diagnostic Output Module Output Data Tags  Name  as listed in Configuration Definition   the Tag Editor   or 1 0 Data   CSTTimestamp Output data Coordinated System Time Timestamp     Timestamp to be used with   8 bytes  Scheduled Outputs and Coordinated System Time  CST   Used to  synchronize outputs across the system by indicating the time  CST  Timestamp  at which the output module is to apply its outputs   Data Output data Off On status for the output point  originating from the controller   1 bit per point  0 Off  1 0n             Accessing the Tags    1  Select Controller Tags   2  Click on the right mouse button  to display the menu   3  Select Monitor Tags    When you access tags  you have two options  You can     monitor tags   option allows you to view tags and change their values  edit tags   option allows you to add or delete tags but not change values      
157. example  Use the following example to wire your module     NOTES  All terminals with the same name Daisy chain to other RTBs                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   are connected together on the ee    module  For example  DC COM can ee e    WG a  be connected to any terminal Group 0  0   104 3 Ie   Group 0  marked GND 0 P GND 0  e s 5 IN 2 15kQ  1 4W  i    GND 0 A   8 7 IN 3 5  resistor  When you daisy chain from a group   GND 1  E 0 9 IN 4  to other RTBs  away connect the Group 1 GND 1  162 1g IN 5 Group 1  daisy chain to the terminal directly GND 1  1   1E IN 6  connected to the supply wire  as GND 1 16 150 IN 7  shown  GND 2  18 17E IN 8  GND 2 20 19 IN 9  This wiring example shows a single Group 2 GND 2  6 2 aig IN 10 mi ie Group 2  voltage source  GND 2 5h 58 IN 11   resistor  m  GND 3 26 25 IN 12  Resistors are not necessary if Wire GND 3  E  28 27 IN 13  Off diagnostic is not used  Group 3 GND 3  1g 30 25 IN 14 Group 3  GND 3  1 32 31V IN 15  To Determine Leakage Resistor  ms GND 3 9a 3D Not used   P S   Field side power supply  Not used     G   36 35 9 Not used  RieaxMaximum    P S Voltage 4 6V dc  1 21mA  RieaxMinimum    P S Voltage SV dc  1 5mA  Recommended Values  P S Volt
158. f 6 11  Program to fault transition Disabled 6 11  Fault mode Off 6 11   Wiring example  Use the following example to wire your module   Isolated 1100    11 0     2 E    our ono           o 2 0  wiring L1 1 D4 3d OUT 1 N O  f  L1 2 O L1 2 Dle 5g OUT 2 N 0  Vy O L2 2  ek L1 3    e 7     OUT 3N0   Meo 14 4  Eo 9 ET   out 4 no            o D 4  L1 5  h2 1 DL    OUT 5 NO   L1 6    G  i 131  OUT 6 N 0   L1 7    G   6 15 g OUT 7 N O   Jumper bar  Cut tolength  4 8  Eis 176 OUT 8 N O     1 9   1 20 19 DT   OUT 9 NO   L1 10  2 2 EN   OUT 10N 0     L1 11  l  23 1 QUT 11 N O  VO  Non isolated L1 12     DL    0UT 12N 0   wiring L1 13  E z 27   OUT 13 N 0      L1 14  E 29 DT   OUT 14N 0   L1 15  132 31 OUT 15 N 0         L1 O    L1 15  ap 33 g Not used  S Not used 36 3 D Not used    7 L2     Daisy chain to other RTBs 30240 M    Simplified schematic     24V        gt                                                     oS        H     J    OUT          Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    30337 M    LED indicator            RELAY OUTPUT        T01234567 9  ST 89 101112131415             3         6                         40455 M    Module Specific Information 7 53       1756 OW16l Specifications                Specification  Value  Specification  Value    Number of Outputs 16 N O   Contacts individually isolated  UL Ratings C300  R150 Pilot Duty  Module Location 1756 ControlLogix Chassis Minimum Load Current   10mA per point  Backplane Current 150mA   5 1V dc  amp  150mA   24V dc Initial
159. f a field device  in this case     though  the No Load bit will not be set  see pages 4 9  d 4 10     Important The Pulse Test does not guarantee the absence of a load  It  merely indicates this condition is possible     Pulse Test is a service that needs to be executed from an RSLogix 5000  program or the module properties page  using the pulse test tab and should  be verified with your load to make sure that there are no false transitions     For an fai  of how to perform a Pulse Test using ladder logic     see pag d B 12     Point Level Electronic Fusing    Diagnostic output modules use electronic fusing to protect output points  from the surge of too much current through that point on the module  If too  much current begins to flow through a point  the fuse is tripped and a point  level fault is sent to the controller     Reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 configuration software or  through ladder logic running on a controller  This feature has a  corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a  fault  For more information on these tags  see Appendix    For an example of how to reset an electronic fuse in RSLogix 5000  see  pag e  6 21  For an example of how to reset an electronic fuse using a ladder    logic program  see page  B 12      Important  Electronic fuses are also reset through a software reset or when  the output module is power cycled     ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 19       Loss of Field Power 
160. g and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 20       Module Specific Information    NOTES  All terminals with the same          name are connected together on  the module  For example  L2  can be connected to any  terminal marked L2 15     When you use the second L2 15  terminal to daisy chain to other  RTBs  always connect the daisy  chain to the terminal directly  connected to the supply wire   as shown     The jumper bar part number is  97739201  Contact your local  Rockwell Automation sales  representative to order  additional jumper bars  if  necessary     1756 IM161    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                 Feature Default value Page of description  Standard change of state OFF ON  Enabled 2 4  ON OFF  Enabled  Input filter time OFF ON  1ms 3 8  ON OFF  1ms  Communications format Input data             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module      0  o         Isolated    wiring 12 20    L2 4 0        Jumper bar  Cut to length          Non isolated  wiring    L2 o        a    fo       L2 0  L2 1  L2 2  L2 3  L2 4  L2 5  L2 6  L2 7  L2 8  L2 9  L2 10  L2 11  L2 12  L2 13  L2 14  L2 15  L2 15    Not used           
161. g example to wire your module     L2 0 o       L2 0  L2 1   L2 2 o       L2 2  L2 3   L2 4 o       12 4  L2 5  L2 6  L2 7  L2 8  L2 9  L2 10  L2 11  L2 12  L2 13  L2 14  L2 15  L2 O  L2 15  a Not used    Isolated    wiring    Jumper bar  Cut to length     Non isolated  wiring                aago                                     sleleisiels                               25                            Dogo ao 2              3 9  36D                       m  S   a                                     N Daisy chain to other RTBs    Simplified schematic    IN O             o o      o L1 0  IN 1 i   IN 2        s o   o L1 2  IN 3   IN 4          o   o    o L1 4  IN 5   IN 6   IN 7   IN 8   IN 9 ft   IN 10  IN 11  IN 12  IN 13  IN 14  IN 15  Not used  Not used          30243 M    LED indicator             __                Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    eM              5V  Y ma a Ny  U   l  GND               Control Bus Display    Interface        AC INPUT              T01234567 0  ST 89 10111213 1415 K                                 20941 M       30338 M    Module Specific Information    1756 IA16I Specifications    7 5          Number of Inputs    16  individually isolated        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    125mA   5 1V dc  amp  3mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 0 71W        Maximum Power Dissipation  Module     4 9W   60  C       Thermal Dissipation    16 71 BTU hr       On State Voltage Range    79 132V ac  47 63Hz       No
162. gix 5000     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Appendix A    Using Software Configuration Tags    Important  Although this appendix presents the option of changing a  module   s configuration through the Tag Editor of  RSLogix 5000  we suggest that you use the module   s  properties tabs to change configuration when possible     When you create a module  module defined data types and tags are created   These Tags allow you to access the Input and Output Data and  Configuration of Data of the module via the controller   s ladder logic     The types of tags created vary for each module  There is also variation  among the tags for any particular module  depending on which  communications format you chose when creating a module     For example  the 1756 IA16I module has four choices of Communications  Formats  Input Data  CST Timestamped Input Data  Listen Only Input  Data  Listen Only CST Timestamped Input Data  If you choose CST  Timestamped Input Data  several more tags are created than if you choose  Input Data     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    A 2 Using Software Configuration Tags       Module Properties    Change of state    Data Monitor    Change of state    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    The following screens show the difference between viewing change of state  for a point on the 1756 IA16I module through the module   s properties tabs  and the Data Monitor in the Tag Editor        E Module Properties   Local 3  1756 IA16I 1 1  x     General   Connectio
163. gnostic Output Module                   6 14  Editing Configuration      0 0    0 0    cece eee eee eee 6 15  Reconfiguring Module Parameters in Remote Run Mode       6 16  Reconfiguring Module Parameters in Program Mode          6 17  Configuring I O Modules in a Remote Chassis               6 18  Input Online Services 524 ie ave ee PE eee 6 20  Output Online Services      yi ees ev evading ds cece ey 6 21  Viewing and Changing Module Tags                      6 22  Chapter Summary and What   s Next                  04   6 23  Chapter 7  What This Chapter Contains              0 0 0 0 00 00s eee 7 1  PSC ALANG giz tae care Gags sew aren ine Rec oe eae y eG rine 7 2  VIS GeDATGL 6 vase teal  ondaure ania sinker akties oe 7 4  TION AS De oo pease uw Quen Se eee Ge GP oe Saas 7 6  1756 IB16 ke daw be cha y yawns side eee daw es 7 8  IFSO 1BIGD sedr torne rene tiatateduen er ew RAST 7 10  DPOB VG ss bette te Ake hd eo atl eae aE os   7 12  1730  B32 csc ete Bhd Rite Bee Sean ORES ge 7 14  POCA CUG ica EEE ee Ostia E AE 7 16  LISG THIGE sidenote enced inben tows taaedrubs tenes 7 18  LOM Gls  e ceearets eee eee roe eee OU Rees 7 20  1756 IN L6 554s 3 ig ae Oe BG EAS AAG ERE AG aes 7 22  WI3G OAIO onnaa a AAT E ERE EREE 7 24  LISOA LOT ar A aes NA tore a a a a a 7 26  IOON S e ptes a Kaan Daweh E Ea 7 28  IOA SD Who dba he n a n aA E 7 30  1756 0ABE iis ease kerata a aE ARA u 7 32  1756 0OBI6D lefe a a a a a a ies 7 34  1750 OBTOE  fs eciiy Res es in Ria cee Ok Vow eae 7 36  ViSG2
164. he RPI  but the control system will guarantee that the  owner controller will receive data at least as often as the specified RPI     Input Module in Remote Chassis with Data Coming At Least as Often as RPI    FA Tw    ControlNet Bridge module   Input module                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        mH   Q     E o  Input data multicast in  O io    j   lel   98 module   s chassis at RPI  I     S    S  nput data at least as often as RPI  ControlNet 40947    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    2 6       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Digital 1 0 Operation Within the ControlLogix System    The    reserved    spot on the network and the module   s RPI are asynchronous  to each other  This means there are Best and Worst Case scenarios as to  when the owner controller will receive updated channel data from the  module in a networked chassis     Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario    In the Best Case scenario  the module performs an RPI multicast with  updated channel data just before the    reserved    network slot is made  available  In this case  the remotely located owner receives the data almost  immediately     Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario    In the Worst Case scenario  the module perfor
165. he number of bits appropriate for each  module   s density are used  For example  the 1756 OB8 module has a  Module Fault Word of 32 bits  But  because the module is an 8 point  module  only the first 8 bits  bits0 7  are used in the Module Fault Word     Fault bits in the Fuse Blown Word  Field Power Loss Word  No Load Word  and Output Verify Word are logically ORed into the Module Fault Word  In  other words  depending on the module type  a bit set in the Module Fault    Word can mean multiple things  It can indicate     e A communications fault   In this case  all 32 bits are set to 1  regardless  of the module   s density     e A fuse blown condition   In this case  only the bit affected is set to 1     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    3 16 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features       Module Fault Word  All modules    Fuse Blown Word       Point Level Group Level  1756 OA8E 1756 0A16  1756 OB8EI 1756 OB16E    Field Power Loss Word  1756 OA8E only    Chapter Summary and  What   s Next    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    e A field power loss condition   In this case  only the bit affected is  set to 1     e A no load condition   In this case  only the bit affected is set to 1   e An output verify condition   In this case  only the bit affected is set to 1     The following graphic provides an overview of the fault reporting process  on ControlLogix digital output modules                                                                                    
166. he point transitions  e g  OFF ON   Once  Change of State has been detected 10ms is ADDed to the input timestamp  and sent to the output module   s timestamp     This will cause the output module to apply its output exactly 10ms   i e  10 000us  after the input changed state     The MOVe instructions update  LastTimestamp    in preparation for the  next change of state     Important  Timestamps are 8 bytes in size  two DINTs  but only the lower  4 bytes of the output timestamp  i e   Time_at_which_Output_Will_Change  are used to schedule the  outputs into the future  to a max of 16 7s or 16 700 000us    LastTimestamp 1     Using Ladder Logic B 11       These tags were created  for this ladder logic        Rung 4 is the standard XIC OTE rung which controls the output point based  upon the input point     The only difference is that the output module is configured for Scheduled  Outputs  The outputs will not get applied until the scheduled time has  occurred                                                                                         Local 0 1 Data 0 Local 1 0 Data 0  4   End   The following screen shows examples of the tags used in the ladder logic as  they appear in the tag editor     Controller Tags   csti  controller   ioj x   Scope   esti  controller 7  Show   Show Al x  Sort   Tag Name x   P   Tag Name      Alias For Base Tag  Type   Style  Description  lt   always_on BOOL  Decim  init BOOL  Decim   gt     E LastTimestamp DINT 2 Decim    LastT imestamp 0  DINT 
167. hematic                       Control Bus Interface                       lt               Display    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    1756 0A16l    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                    Feature Default value Page of description  Communications format Output data  Program mode off 6 11  Program to fault transition Disabled 6 11  Fault mode off 6 11             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      Isolated wiring  L1 0 0    L1 0   e    EL   out o        o 12 0  L1 1 8 4 3 D OUT 1  L1 20       1 2   Tee sE   our 2         _9 12 2  L1 3 T ls 76N   OuT 3    L1 4 O  L1 4  Eo oo   OuT 4 N  O 12 4  L1 5   Ae 2 neo   OUT 5  L1 6  1E    BIT   our 6  L1 7   Jl 18 so   OUT 7  Jumper bar  Cut to length  Li 8   qj vO OUT 8  L1    20 19E OUT 9  L1 10 2 a     OUT 10    f L1 11   la 23 OUT 11             Non isolated L1 12 2   g   0UT 12     e  wiring L1 13 28 27 OUT 13            e  L1 14    eq  30 2 OUT 14       L1 15 Ay  32 31   OUT 15 e  L1           L1 15   ya  34 3E    Not used  a Not used   E 3 3s    Not used O    5 L2       0       Daisy chain to other RTBs apa  Surge Current Chart LED i
168. iagnostic  is available     Important  Each controller can only establish 255 connections  in any  combination of direct or rack  In other words  you can use a  rack connection between an owner controller and multiple  remote I O modules while simultaneously using a direct  connection between that same controller and any other I O  modules in the same remote chassis     In this example  the owner is still communicating with all I O in the remote  chassis but has used only one connection  The data from all three modules is  sent together simultaneously at the RPI  This option eliminates the need for  three separate connections     Using a Rack Connection with 1 0 in a Remote Chassis    Local chassis    ControiNet Bridge module ControlNet Bridge module             Remote chassis                      oO             Eos                           o    HI B                               cy   go  a a          ot       c  o             co          oo                                     H Rack connection for a             1 0 in remote chassis                                  acuz    mres                         a e   a  i E a oO  acuz                                                                                                                                  ControlNet 41021    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    2 14 Digital 1 0 Operation Within the ControlLogix System       2 For more information         Chapter Summary and  What   s Next    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999 
169. ic Digital 1 0 Module Features       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Electronic Keying    Instead of plastic mechanical backplane keys  electronic keying allows the  ControlLogix system to control what modules belong in the various slots of  a configured system     During module configuration  you must choose one of the following keying  options for your I O module     e Exact match   all of the parameters described below must match or the  inserted module will reject a connection to the controller    e Compatible match   all of the parameters described below  except  minor revision must match or the inserted module will reject a  connection to the controller  In this case  the minor revision of the  module must be greater than or equal to that of the configured slot     e Disable keying   the inserted module will accept a connection to the  controller regardless of its type    ATTENTION  Be extremely cautious when using the  disable keying option  if used incorrectly  this option can  lead to personal injury or death  property damage or  economic loss     When an I O module is inserted into a slot in a ControlLogix chassis  the  module compares the following information for itself to that of the  configured slot it is entering     Vendor   Product Type  Catalog Number  Major Revision  Minor Revision    This feature can prevent the inadvertent operation of a control system with  the wrong module in the wrong slot     ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4
170. ime  On to off Programmable filter  Oms  1ms  2ms  9ms or 18ms  Hardware delay 2ms maximum plus filter time  Diagnostic Functions  Change of state Software configurable    Time stamp on inputs        200us       Short Inrush Current    250mA peak  decaying to  lt 37  in 22ms  without activation        Cyclic Update Time    User selectable  100s minimum 750ms maximum              Reverse Polarity Protection Yes  Isolation Voltage  Group to group 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable       RTB Screw Torque  Cage clamp     4 4 inch pounds  0 4Nm  maximum       RTB Keying    User defined mechanical keying                   RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB  1756 TBCH or TBS6H    Environmental Conditions   Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F    Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F    Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm    stranded    3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 123   Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch  3 2mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous    lt fm gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous            marked for all applicable directives       Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the
171. in ProgramMode if comm failure   1 outputs got to FaultMode if comm failure                   Input Data Tags  Table A D  Standard Output Module Input Data Tags  Name  as listed in Configuration Definition   the Tag Editor   or 1 0 Data   CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp     Timestamp of diagnostic input   8 bytes  data including fusing  see BlownFuse  NoLoad  OutputVerifyFault   FieldPwrLoss   which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes  away   Data Input data Data     Off On status for the output point ECHOED back from the output     1 bit per point     module  This is used to verify proper communication only No field side  verification is done  For field side verification  see OutputVerifyFault   0 Off  1 0n       Fault   1 bit per point     Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a point is faulted and  1 0 data for that point may be incorrect  Check other diagnostic faults  if  they are available  for further diagnosis of the root cause  If communication  to the input module is lost  then all points for the module will be faulted   O no fault  1 fault  FuseBlown  NoLoad  OutputVerifyFault   FieldPwrLoss  or CommFault        FuseBlown    1 bit per point        Input Data Fuse is Blown     An electronic or mechanical fuse has detected a short or  overload condition for an output point  All FuseBlown conditions are latched  and must be reset by the User    O no fault  1 fault          Publication 1756 6 5 
172. ing process  on ControlLogix digital input modules                                                                                                              Bit 31 Bit 0  A communications fault sets all bits in the Module  Fault Word  A Field Power Loss or Open Wire condition  sets the appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word  Wise    Fault and Status Reporting  Between Output Modules  and Controller    ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features 3 15    ControlLogix digital output modules multicast fault status data to any  owner listening controllers     All output modules maintain a Module Fault Word  the highest level of fault  reporting  Some modules also use additional words to indicate fault  conditions  as shown on the next page     The following tags can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault  has occurred     e Module Fault Word   This word provides fault summary reporting  It   s  tag name is Fault  This word is available on all digital output modules     e Fuse Blown Word   This word indicates a point group fuse blown on  the module  It   s tag name is FuseBlown  This word is only available on  1756 OA16  OA8E  OB16E  and OB8EI     For more information on fusing  see page    e Field Power Loss Word   This word indicates a loss of field power to a  point on the module  It   s tag name is FieldPwrLoss  This word is only  available on 1756 OA8E     For more information on field power loss  see page 3 13     All words are 32 bit  although only t
173. ing value     e Ifthe module has a Major Revision  gt  2  it will return a negative  timestamping value until the module is synchronized with the  owner controller and the first Change of State condition occurs            For more information        ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features 3 7    Look at the Module Properties page of RSLogix 5000 to determine if the  module has been synchronized with the owner controller and whether the  controller is synchronized with the CST     For more information on synchronizing owner controllers and modules  with the CST  see the Logix5550 Controller User Manual   publication 1756 6 5 12     Producer Consumer Model    By using the Producer Consumer model  ControlLogix I O modules can  produce data without having been polled by a controller first  The modules  produce the data and any other owner controller device can decide to  consume it     For example  an input module produces data and any number of processors  can consume the data at the same time  This eliminates the need for one    processor to send the data to another processor  For a more detailed  explanation of this process  see Chapter 2     LED Status Information   Each ControlLogix digital I O module has an LED indicator on the front of  the module that allows you to check the module health and operational  status of a module  The LED displays vary for each module     The following status can be checked with the LED indicators     e T O status   This yellow displa
174. ion 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 44       Module Specific Information    1756 OB8EI  Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   Feature Default value Page of description  Communications method CST timestamped fuse  data   output data  Program mode Off 6 11  Program to fault transition Disabled 6 11  Fault mode Off 6 11  Wiring example  Use the following example to wire your module   E L peo    eye Cel ouo       4   Isolated     4   RINOUT O0   qs 3 OUT 0 l  wiring DC 1    le 5 OUT 1  7 RTN OUT 1   ol  7 4 OUT 1  L L pea    eyo 9 IG OUT 2    J A      e RTN OUT 2 l2 nk ouT 2               NOTES  All terminals with the DC 3    gu so OUT 3  Sach RTN OUT 3 hs 15    OUT 3  Hs gaea pa er A Non isolated m   DC 4     UO 17 OUT 4        P O E ATS wiring A     RTNOUT 4   E a2 19 OUT 4  ENS   Decs     Tela a EHP    OUT S       connected to either A pq ours loa rE OUT 5 y  terminal marked OUT 0  DC 6 OUT 6    Dai
175. ischarge     ATTENTION  Electrostatic discharge can damage  integrated circuits or semiconductors if you touch  backplane connector pins  Follow these guidelines when  you handle the module     e Touch a grounded object to discharge static potential  e Wear an approved wrist strap grounding device  e Do not touch the backplane connector or   connector pins  e Do not touch circuit components inside the module  e If available  use a static safe work station  e When not in use  keep the module in its   static shield box    These modules are designed to be installed or removed while chassis power  is applied     ATTENTION  When you insert or remove a module  while backplane power is applied  an electrical arc may  occur  An electrical arc can cause personal injury or  property damage by     e sending an erroneous signal to your system   s field  devices causing unintended machine motion or loss of  process control    e causing an explosion in a hazardous environment    Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to   contacts on both the module and its mating connectors     Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can  affect module operation     In this chapter you learned about     e what ControlLogix digital I O modules are  e types of ControlLogix digital I O modules    Move on to Chapter 2 fo learn about digital I O operation within the  ControlLogix system     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    What This Chapter Contains    Ownership    Chapter 2    Digit
176. ision 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 42 Module Specific Information       1756 0B8  Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                    Feature Default value Page of description  Communications format Output data  Program mode Off  Program to fault transition Disabled  Fault mode Off 6 11             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          Daisy chain to  other RTBs  Sie DC 0    ie  G    out o    _ 4      DC 0    ie  IEB OUT 1  NOTES  All terminals with the same Group 0 DC 0    ic Ie OuT 2 Group 0  name are connected on the  DC 0 1 J    module  For example  DC H ID ie ele  COM can be connected to i WaT  RTN OUT 0 ca    either terminal marked      ID cm ap il  RTN OUT 1  I WT  DC 1           OUT 4  DIE  When you daisy chain from DC 1       IEB OUT 5  a group to another RTB  au is    Group 1 T r  Group 1  always connect the daisy DC 1    ie IGS OUT 6  chain to the terminal 17  di
177. ital input modules   1 byte per group  for OFF to ON transition  Operates on groups of 8 points   Valid DC filter times 0  1  2ms  Valid AC filter times 1  2ms  OpenWireEn Configuration Open Wire     Enables Open Wire diagnostic    1 bit per point  O disable  1 enable  Input Data Tags  Table A G  Diagnostic Input Module Input Data Tags  Name  as listed in Configuration Definition   the Tag Editor   or 1 0 Data   CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp     Timestamp can be configured to   8 bytes  indicate the time that data changed  see COSOffOnEn  COSOnOffEn   COSStatus  DiagCOSDisable  and or the time that a diagnostic fault  occurred  see OpenWireEn  FieldPwrLossEn    Data Input data Off On status for the input point    1 bit per point  0 Off  1 0n  Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults which indicates that a point is faulted and   1 bit per point  input data for that point may be incorrect  Check other diagnostic faults  if  they are available  for further diagnosis of the root cause  If communication  to the input module is lost  then all points for the module will be faulted   O no fault  1 fault  OQpenWire or FieldPwrLoss or Comm Fault   FieldPwrLoss Input Data Field Power Loss     AC input diagnostic detects that field power has failed   1 bit per point  or is disconnected from the module  Open Wire will also be detected   O no fault  1 fault  OpenWire Input data Open Wire     Diagnostic which detects that a wire has been disconnected 
178. ithout activation        Cyclic Update Time    User selectable  100us minimum 750ms maximum                          Reverse Polarity Protection Yes  Isolation Voltage  Group to group 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  Cage clamp  4 4 inch pounds  0 4Nm  maximum  RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB  1756 TBCH or TBS6H    Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing       Conductors Wire Size    22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum          Category 423  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch  3 2mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous            marked for all applicable directives       Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual     Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations   FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     a ona       Publication 1
179. kQ   Input Delay Time  Off to on Programmable filter  Oms  1ms or 2ms  Hardware delay 1ms maximum plus filter time  On to off Programmable filter  Oms  1ms  2ms  9ms or 18ms  Hardware delay 4ms maximum plus filter time  Diagnostic Functions  Change of state Software configurable  Time stamp of inputs     200us  Short Inrush Current 250mA peak  decaying to  lt 37  in 22 ms  without activation   Cyclic Update Time User selectable  100us minimum 750ms maximum   Reverse Polarity Protection Yes  Isolation Voltage  Channel to channel 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between channels   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  Cage clamp  4 4 inch pounds  0 4Nm  maximum  RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB  1756 TBCH or TBSGH    Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 123  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch  3 2mm  maximum  Agency Certification D   when product or packaging is marked    e Class   Div 2 Hazardous    lt fm gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous   C     marked for all applicable directives          Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning
180. l 1  1756 0A8 1 1  x     m Identification r Status  Vendor  Major Fault     Product Type  Minor Fault   Product Code  Internal State   Revision   Serial Number           Configured     Product Name  Owned           Module Identity        m Coordinated System Time  CST   Timer Hardware     Timer Syne ed  Refresh   Reset Module  Finish  gt  gt    Help      Click here to move to the next page                   Set the state of the outputs in  Program Mode    Choose a state for the outputs  if communications fail in  Program Mode    IMPORTANT  Outputs always go  to Fault mode if communications  fail in Run mode          This screen appears last in the  wizard series of screens  It is  used during online monitoring  but not initial configuration    Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 11       The configuration page appears next  For example  this screen appears for  the 1756 OA8 module  The choices available on the configuration screen  will vary according to the module selected     E New Module   Local 1  1756 0A8 1 1        Click here to accept the parameters you  have configured for your module    E New Module   Local 1  1756 0A8 1 1        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    6 12 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules       Configuring a Standard  Input Module    Click on the box to enable the  change of state for a point    Configuring a Standard  Output Module    Change the Program Mode value here  Change the Fault Mode value here       The follo
181. l digital 1 0 words in the remote chassis  and sends them to controller as a single rack image       Remote connection    An 1 0 connection where the controller establishes an  individual connection with 1 0 modules in a remote  chassis       Removal and insertion    ControlLogix feature that allows a user to install or       under power  RIUP  remove a module or RTB while power is applied  Removable Terminal Field wiring connector for 1 0 modules  Block  RTB        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    P 4 About This User Manual       Related Products and  Documentation    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999          Requested packet The maximum amount of time between broadcasts of  interval  RPI  1 0 data  Run mode Controller program is executing    Inputs are actively producing data   Outputs are actively controlled                Service A system feature that is performed on user demand  such  as fuse reset or diagnostic latch reset   System side Backplane side of the interface to the I O module   Tag A named area of the controller   s memory where data is  stored   Timestamping ControlLogix process that stamps a change in input data    with a relative time reference of when that change    occurred       The following table lists related ControlLogix products and documentation                             Cat  number  Document title  Pub  number    1756 PA72  ControlLogix Power Supply Installation Instructions 1756 5 1    PB72   1756 A4  ControlLogix Chassis Installation In
182. lLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Timestamping In Conjunction with Scheduled Outputs   Timestamping can be used in conjunction with the scheduled outputs   feature so that after input data changes state and a timestamp occurs  an   output point will actuate at some configured time in the future  You can   schedule outputs up to 16 seconds into the future    When you use timestamping of inputs and scheduled outputs  you must    e choose a Communications Format for each input and output module that  allows timestamping  For more information on choosing a  Communications Format  see Chapte    e have a controller in the same rack as both I O modules    e disable Change of State for all input points on the input module except  the point being timestamped    For scheduled outputs to work most effectively  remember the following     e The time to schedule outputs to transition in the future must account for  any controller  backplane and network delays     e The I O modules must reside in the same rack as the timemaster     For a detailed example of how to write ladder logic to use these features  see  Appendix B     Module Major Revision Considerations with Timestamping    When using timestamping for inputs or diagnostic timestamping of I O  modules  remember the following conditions that may occur depending on  the module   s Major Revision     e Ifthe module has a Major Revision   1  it will always return a positive  timestamp
183. le     Table 5 A  Wiring Connections                                                                         Catalog Number  Page for Wiring RTB   Connections    1756 1A16 7 2 20 pin  1756 IA16l 36 pin  1756 IA8D 20 pin  1756 1B16 20 pin  1756 IB16D 36 pin  1756 1B16l 36 pin  1756 1B32 36 pin  1756 IC16 7 16 20 pin  1756 1H16l 7 18 36 pin  1756 IM16l 7 20 36 pin  1756 IN16 7 22 20 pin  1756 0A16 20 pin  1756 OA16l 36 pin  1756 0A8 20 pin  1756 OA8D 20 pin  1756 OA8E 20 pin  1756 0B16D 36 pin  1756 OB16E 7 36 20 pin  1756 0B16l 7 38 36 pin  1756 0B32 7 40 36 pin       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 5 5       Assembling The Removable  Terminal Block and the    Housing                                  Table 5 A   Wiring Connections   Catalog Number  Page for Wiring RTB   Connections    1756 0B8 20 pin  1756 OB8El 36 pin  1756 0C8 36 pin  1756 OH8I 36 pin  1756 ON8 7 50 20 pin  1756 OW16l 7 52 36 pin  1756 0X8I 7 54 36 pin             Removable housing covers the wired RTB to protect wiring connections  when the RTB is seated on the module     1  Align the grooves at the bottom of each side of the housing with the side  edges of the RTB     2  Slide the RTB into the housing until it snaps into place        Groove  Side edge of RTB         Groove    Side edge of RTB    1756 TBCH RTB shown for reference 20858 M    Important  If additional wire routing space is required for your application   use extended depth housing 1756 TBE     Publi
184. le Specific Information    1756 IA8D Specifications    7 7          Number of Inputs    8  4 points common        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    100mA   5 1V dc  amp  3mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 0 58W                 Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  A5W   60  C  Thermal Dissipation 15 35 BTU hr  On State Voltage Range 79 132V ac  47 63Hz  Nominal Input Voltage 120V ac       On State Current    74V   5mA ac  47 63Hz minimum  16mA   132V ac  47 63Hz maximum       Maximum Off State Voltage    20V       Maximum Off State Current    2 5mA       Maximum Input Impedance   132V ac    8 25kQ   60Hz       Input Delay Time  Off to on  Hardware Delay  On to Off  Hardware Delay    Programmable filter  1ms  amp  2ms  10ms maximum plus filter time  Programmable filter  Ims  amp  18ms  8ms maximum plus filter time       Diagnostic Functions  Open Wire  Loss of Power  Time Stamp of Diagnostics  Change of State  Time stamp of Inputs    Off state leakage current 1 5mA minimum  Transition range 46 to 85V ac       ims   Software configurable       200us       Short Inrush Current    250mA peak  decaying to  lt 37  in 22ms   without activation        Cyclic Update Time    User Selectable  100us minimum 750ms maximum                       Isolation Voltage   Group to group 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s    250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups    User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configur
185. lers  making the exact same changes    in all controllers     3  Disable the Inhibit box in each owner   s configuration  if you enabled this    box in step 1     Important  If all owner controllers have exactly the same configuration  after you have made changes  all the controllers will reestablish    communication with the input module     If multiple controllers have different configuration after you  have made changes  only one controller  the first one to send  changes to the module  will reestablish communications with    the input module     Digital 1 0 Operation Within the ControlLogix System 2 13       Rack Connections    wR    Owner controller    When a digital I O module is located in a remote chassis  with respect to its  owner   the user may select rack optimization or listen only rack  optimization in the Communications Format field during initial module  configuration  This depends on the bridge module configuration  i e  if the  CNB is selected for Listen Only rack option  then the I O module only  allows the Listen Only rack option      A rack connection economizes connection usage between the owner and  digital I O in the remote chassis  Rather than having several direct  connections with individual RPI values  the owner has a single rack  connection with a single RPI value  That RPI value accommodates all  digital I O modules in the rack connection     The input  or data echo  information is limited to general faults and data   No additional status  e g  d
186. les  and Controllers    Module Fault Word  All modules    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    ControlLogix digital input modules multicast fault status data to any owner   listening controllers     All input modules maintain a Module Fault Word  the highest level of fault  reporting  Some modules also use additional words to indicate  fault conditions  as shown on the next page     The following tags can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault  has occurred     e Module Fault Word   This word provides fault summary reporting  It   s  tag name is Fault  This word is available on all digital input modules     All words are 32 bit  although only the number of bits appropriate for each  module   s density are used  For example  the 1756 IA16I module has a  Module Fault Word of 32 bits  But  because this is a 16 point module  only  the first 16 bits  bits 0 15  are used in the Module Fault Word     Fault bits in the Field Power Loss Word and Open Wire Word are logically  ORed into the Module Fault Word  In other words  depending on the  module type  a bit set in the Module Fault Word can mean multiple things  It  can indicate     e A communications fault   In this case  all 32 bits are set to 1  regardless  of the module   s density     e A field power loss condition   In this case  only the bit s  affected is  set to 1     e An open wire condition   In this case  only the bit s  affected is set to 1     The following graphic provides an overview of the fault report
187. ll terminals with the same name wiring DC 2    o Dc 2 4   TE le sia OuT 2 o DC 2    output  are connected together on the p OUT 3 wiring  module  For example  DC    can a E 0     OUT 4  be connected to either terminal   iri     S  S 7  marked 015  Sink output wiring DC 5     h2 14 OUT 5   DC 6    o     DC 6     TO 131  OUT 6          cDC 6     When you use the second DC 7    116 151g OUT 7  DC 15    terminal to daisy chain Jumper bar  Cut to length  DC 8     J n  178 OUT 8  to other RTBs  always connect the n DC 9    Tayo 1918 OUT 9  daisy chain to the terminal DC 10      iz 2I DE   out 10  directly connected to the supply DC 11     Ta 4 23 OUT 11  wire  as shown  Non isolated DC 12   an  12    1 25 OUT 12      a wiring DC 13     E 27 OUT 13 Non isolated  utputs can be wired in a sink or sourcing  source configuration as shown DC 14      po 29 OUT 14 output  above  DC 15     1132 31   OUT 15 ah  DC   o       p   15     Te  sE    Not used  e  The jumper bar part number is eo Not used    i3 35  Not used  97739201  Contact your local   DC     Rockwell Automation sales    representative to order additional    jumper bars  if necessary        a   Daisy chain to other RTBs 30242 M  Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator  aa   Suse G gt  _ DC OUTPUT   5V 3    J Continuous   30  C ST01234567 9  Aah S i ST 8 9 101112131415       a ee Continuous   60  C 8  S          Control Bus Interface Z  ca Display 0 Time 10ms 40457 M  30182 M 40849 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   Jul
188. lth and  operational status of a module  The LED displays vary for each module     The following status can be checked with the LED indicators     e T O status   This yellow display indicates the ON OFF state of the field  device     e Module status   This green display indicates the module   s  communication status     e Fault status   This display is only found on some modules and indicates  the presence or absence of various faults     e Fuse status   This display is only found on electronically fused modules  and indicates the state of the module   s fuse     For examples of LED indicators on ControlLogix digital I O modules  see  Chaptef 7     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    4 8 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Full Class   Division 2 Compliance    All ControlLogix digital I O modules maintain CSA Class I Division 2  system certification  This allows the ControlLogix system to be placed in  an environment other than only a 100  hazard free     Important  Modules should not be pulled under power  nor should a  powered RTB be removed  in a Class I Division 2 environment     CE CSA UL FM Agency Approvals    Any ControlLogix digital I O modules that have obtained CE CS A UL FM  agency approval are marked as such  Ultimately  all digital modules will  have these agency approvals and be marked accordingly     Diagnostic Latch of Information    Diagnostic Latching allows diagnostic I O modules to latch a fault in
189. ma 47 63Hz  16 30V ac  current lt 50ma 47 63Hz  Output Current Rating  Per Point 2A maximum   60  C  Per Module    5A maximum   30  C  4A maximum   60  C  Linear derating        Surge Current per Point    20A for 43ms each  repeatable every 2s   60  C             Minimum Load Current 10mA per point  Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 5V peak   2A  amp  6V peak   load current lt 50mA  Maximum Off State Leakage Current 3mA per point             Commutating Voltage 4V us for loads gt 50mA  0 2V us for loads lt 50mA   Output Delay Time  Off to on 9 3ms   60Hz  11ms   50Hz  On to off 9 3ms   60Hz  11ms   50Hz  Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum  reference to the CST       Configurable Fault States per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Configurable States in Program Mode per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Fusing    Not protected   Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs  See  publication 1492 2 12                                Isolation Voltage  Group to group 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  NEMA  7 9 inch pounds  0 8 1Nm   RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB  1756 TBNH or TBSH    Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185
190. maximum   Maximum Off State Voltage 20V   Maximum Off State Current 2 5mA   Maximum Input Impedance   132V ac 10 15kQ   60Hz       Input Delay Time          Off to on Programmable filter  1ms  amp  2ms  Hardware delay 10ms maximum plus filter time  On to off Programmable filter  Ims  amp  18ms  Hardware delay 8ms maximum plus filter time   Diagnostic Functions  Change of State Software configurable  Time stamp of Inputs     200us   Short Inrush Current 250mA peak  decaying to  lt 37  in 22ms    without activation        Change of State on Inputs    Software configurable  Within 200s        Cyclic Update Time    User selectable  100us minimum 750ms maximum                       Isolation Voltage   Group to group 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s    250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups     User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  NEMA  7 9 inch pounds  0 8 1Nm   RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB  1756 TBNH or TBSH    Environmental Conditions   Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F    Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F    Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing       Conductors Wire Size    22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum          Category 123  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch  8mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked        w     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous  
191. minal Input Voltage    120V ac       On State Current    5mA   79V ac  47 63Hz minimum  15mA   132 V ac  47 63Hz  maximum             Maximum Off State Voltage 20V ac  Maximum Off State Current 2 5mA  Maximum Input Impedance   132V ac 8 8kQ   60Hz       Input Delay Time       Off to on Programmable filter  1ms  amp  2ms   Hardware delay 10ms maximum plus filter time   On to off Programmable filter  Ims  amp  18ms   Hardware delay 8ms maximum plus filter time  Diagnostic Functions   Change of state Software configurable    Time stamp of inputs        200us       Short Inrush Current    250mA peak  decaying to  lt 37  in 22 ms  without activation        Cyclic Update Time    User selectable  100us minimum 750ms maximum        Isolation Voltage  Channel to channel    100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s     250V ac maximum continuous voltage between channels                    User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  Cage clamp  4 4 inch pounds  0 4Nm  maximum  RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB  1756 TBCH or TBS6H    Environmental Conditions   Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F    Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F    Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing       Conductors Wire Size    22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded    3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum          Category 123  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch  3 2mm  maximum  Agency Certifi
192. mmon to all ControlLogix diagnostic digital  T O modules     Removal and Insertion Under Power  RIUP     All ControlLogix I O diagnostic modules may be inserted and removed  from the chassis while power is applied  This feature allows greater  availability of the overall control system because  while the module is being  removed or inserted  there is no additional disruption to the rest of the  controlled process     Module Fault Reporting    ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O modules provide both hardware and  software indication when a module fault has occurred  Each module   s LED  fault indicator and RSLogix 5000 will graphically display this fault and  include a fault message describing the nature of the fault     This feature allows you to determine how your module has been affected  and what action should be taken to resume normal operation     Fully Software Configurable    The software uses a custom  easily understood interface to write  configuration  All module features are enabled or disabled through the I O  configuration portion of RSLogix 5000     The user can also use the software to interrogate any module in the system  to retrieve serial number  revision information  catalog number  vendor    identification  error fault information  or diagnostic counters     By eliminating such tasks as setting hardware switches and jumpers  the  software makes module configuration easier and more reliable     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    4 4 ControlLogix Diagnost
193. ms an RPI multicast  just after the    reserved    network slot has passed  In this case  the  owner controller will not receive data until the next available  network slot     Important  Enabling the COS feature on an input module in a remote  chassis allows the module to multicast data at both the RPI rate  and when the input changes state  This helps to reduce the  Worst Case time     The following table summarizes the Best Case and Worst Case scenarios   from the time an input changes state to the time the owner controller will  receive the data              Table 2 A  Best and Worst Case Scenarios For Remote Input Data Transfer  Best case scenario Worst case scenario  COS disabled Backplane Network Slightly less than twice the  transfer times   lt 1mS  RPI  COS enabled Backplane Network Slightly less than the RPI  transfer times   lt 1mS              Digital I O Operation Within the ControlLogix System 2 7       When selecting values for the remotely located module   s RPI  system  throughput is optimized when its RPI value is a power of 2 times the current  NUT running on ControlNet     For example  the following table shows recommended RPI values for a  system using a NUT of 5mS                                      Table 2 B  Recommended RPI Values for System Using NUT of 5mS  NUT 5mS   x20 x2  x22 x23 x24 x25 x26 x2   Optimal RPI   5mS 10mS 20mS 40mS 80mS 160mS 320mS 640mS  Values  mS   Output Module Operation An owner controller sends output data to an output module 
194. mum On State Voltage Drop 2V dc   2A  Maximum Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point  Output Delay Time  Off to on 1ms maximum  On to off 2ms maximum  Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum  reference to the CST       Configurable Fault States per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Configurable States in Program Mode per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Fusing    Not protected   Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs  See  publication 1492 2 12        Reverse Polarity Protection    None   If the module is wired incorrectly  outputs may be damaged                                Isolation Voltage  Group to group 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  NEMA  7 9 inch pounds  0 8 1Nm   RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB  1756 TBNH or TBSH   Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22    14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 423  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch  8mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked               e Class   Div 2 Hazardous    lt N Class   Div 2 Hazardous       APPRO
195. n   DC 1  o  23 OUT 11   DC 1  o 2 25 OUT 12  This wiring example shows a single  DC 1 gz 2714 OUT 13  voltage source  Group 1  DC 1  Ha 2k   ouT 14 Group 1  GND 1 gj 3 OUT 15  GND 1 ga 3 Not used  Not used   Es ssia    Not used  Daisy chain to  other RTBs         40173 M  DC COM  Simplified schematic  DC Surge Current Chart LED indicator  Short Circuit q CO surge  Detect    aa Optoisolation C a i   C gt  DC OUTPUT  aaa E     a 8101234567 3  yE P HA     RE Eal Continuous  30  C    pr o1294567 E  7 3 ST 8 9 10 11 1213 1415  H l   Continuous   60  C FLT 8 9 10111213 1415  pay    OUT T  oa  Control p DIAGNOSTIC  Bus   RIN ee  Interface Display Output verify No Load Lc 0 r 10ms  30343 M Time 40849 M 40463 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Module Specific Information 7 35       1756 0B16D Specifications       Number of Outputs    16  8 points common        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    250mA   5 1V dc  amp  140mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 4 64W                 Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  3 3W   60  C   Thermal Dissipation 11 25 BTU hr   Output Voltage Range 19 2 30V dc   Output Current Rating  Per Point 2A maximum   30  C  amp  1A maximum   60  C  Linear derating   Per Module 8A maximum   30  C  amp  4A maximum   60  C  Linear derating        Surge Current per Point    4A for 10ms each  repeatable every 1s                      Minimum Load Current 3mA per point  Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 2V dc   2A  Maximum Off
196. n   Module Info Configuration      Backplane         Input Fitter Time  ms                 qq             Status  Offline            Controller Tags   Sample controller     Scope   Sample contraller   gt   Filter   howa Sort   TaaName z        Value   Local 1 C DiagCOSDisable  Local 1 C FilterOffOn_0_7   Local 1 C FilterOnOft_O_7  Local 1 C FilterOffOn_8_15     Local 1 C FilterOnOff_8_15  ELocal 1  C Filter0ffOn_16_23  Local 1 C FilterOnOff_16_23  Local 1 C FilterOffOn_24_31 Decimal SINT  HLocal 1 C Filter0n0ff_24_31 Decimal SINT          AB 1756_DI C 0  Decimal BOOL  Decimal SINT  Decimal SINT  Decimal SINT  Decimal SINT  Decimal SINT  Decimal SINT                                              ee el a el el be             tocat tE EGSOnGHEn 2 0000_0000_0  Binary DINT     Local 1 C COSOffOnEn 2 0000_0000_0  Binary DINT   Local 1   AND 4B 1756_DI_Timest   Local 2 C fa 4B 1756_DO_AC_E   Local 2   Ltd AB  756_D0_AC_E             a ee  Monitor Tags A Edit Tags 4                                                              Both screens show the same feature on the module     Using Software Configuration Tags A 3    Module Tag Names and The set of tags associated with any module depends on the type of module  Definitions and the Communications Format chosen during configuration     Standard Input Module Tags    The following tables list and define all tags that may be used for  ControlLogix standard digital input modules  Input modules have two types  of tags  configuration and inpu
197. n from a group to  another RTB  always connect the daisy                            chain to the terminal directly connected Group 1   to the supply wire  as shown    This wiring example shows a single   voltage source    Simplified schematic   5V  _IN O  o  12 0 p       5Eg  GND     gt       Control Bus Display  Interface    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Daisy chain to  other RTBs                                                                                                                                                                      IN 1 ie ie   IN 3 ie  B  IN 5 IB O  IN 7 KE O  L2 0 ie i   IN 9 IDD  IN 11 ie i  IN 13 He D  IN 15        12 1    ED E  EN                                     l    IN O        _ 5    IN 2        IN 4 Group 0  IN 6  L2 0    Ng     oTo    IN 10       Group 1  IN 12 E    IN 14    L2 1       40176 M    LED indicator             AC INPUT                ST 01234567 0  ST 8 9 101112131415 K                30338 M       20941 M          Module Specific Information 7 3       1756 IA16 Specifications       Number of Inputs    16  8 points common        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    105mA   5 1V dc  amp  2mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 0 58W        Maximum Power Dissipation  Module     5 8W   60  C       Thermal Dissipation    18 41 BTU hr       On State Voltage Range    74 132V ac  47 63Hz                   Nominal Input Voltage 120V ac   On State Current 5mA   74V ac minimum  13mA   132V ac 
198. n the increased flexibility provided by multiple  owners and the ramifications of using multiple owners  see page 2 11      Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    2 2 Digital 1 0 Operation Within the ControlLogix System       Using RSNetWorx and  RSLogix 5000    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    The I O configuration portion of RSLogix5000 generates the configuration  data for each I O module in the control system  whether the module is  located in a local or remote chassis  A remote chassis  also known as  networked  contains the I O module but not the module   s owner controller     Configuration data is transferred to the controller during the program  download and subsequently transferred to the appropriate I O modules     T O modules in the same chassis as the controller are ready to run as soon as  the configuration data has been downloaded  You must run RSNetWorx to  enable I O modules in the networked chassis     Running RSNetWorx transfers configuration data to networked modules  and establishes a Network Update Time  NUT  for ControlNet that is  compliant with the desired communications options specified for each  module during configuration     If you are not using I O modules in a networked chassis  running  RSNetWorx is not necessary  However  anytime a controller references   an I O module in a networked chassis  RSNetWorx must be run to configure  ControlNet  Follow these general guidelines when configuring I O  modules     1  Configure all I O modules for a
199. n your module has a distinct tag that can be used in  the processor   s ladder logic     You can access a module   s tags through RSLogix 5000 as shown below            RSLogix 5000   user_doc BE  File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help      alala a     lel elf all e ale   m  iad    Driver   lt none gt                             a Abeta aH ola   gt   4   gt    user imer Counter Input Output       B  Controller user_doc    E Syster   5 Power _ Edit Tags  Sj Tasks   a MainTask  2  MainProgram  Program Tags   E  MainRoutine                                 E3 Unscheduled Programs  6 6 Data Types   Eg Predefined   Ep Module Defined  5 6 1 0 Configuration  J  1  1756414161 Sample_n                     Locat1 C     ELocat1 1          Because the process of viewing and changing a module   s configuration tags  is broader in scope than can be addressed in this chapter  you must turn to  Appendix  A ffor more information and sample tag collections     Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 23    Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about     What   s Next  e configuring ControlLogix digital I O modules  e configuration tags  e editing module configuration    Move on to Chapter  7 to use module specific information     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Chapter 7    Module Specific Information    What This Chapter Contains This chapter provides module specific information for all ControlLogix  digital modules  The information is separated
200. nated System Time  CST  for their  respective chassis  The CST is a chassis specific time that is not  synchronized with  or in any way connected to  the time generated over  ControlNet to establish a NUT  as described in Chapter    You can configure your digital input modules to access the CST and  timestamp input data with a relative time reference  i e  the value of the  CST  of when that input data changes state     Important  Because only one CST value is returned to the controller when  any input point changes state  it is recommended that you use  timestamping on only one input point per module     Timestamping for a Sequence of Events    The CST can be used to establish a sequence of events occurring at a  particular input module point by timestamping the input data  To determine  a sequence of events  you must     e Set the input module   s communications format to  CST Timestamped  Input Data    e Enable Change of state for the input point where a sequence will occur   Disable COS for all other points on the module     If you decide to configure multiple input points for COS  your module  generates a unique CST each time any of those input points change state  as  long as the changes do not occur within 500uUS of each other     If multiple input points configured for COS change state within 500us of    each other  a single CST value is generated for all  making it appear that  they changed at exactly the same time     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    3 6 Contro
201. ncrease total output current  to 50mA  I V R   At 50mA and above  module has a higher commutating dv dt rating  When adding a resistor for the output to L2  be sure it is  rated for the power that it will dissipate  P  V  2  R   If commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 50 500mA range  L1 AC waveform could be   at fault  Be sure the waveform is a good sinusoid  void if any anomalies such as distorted or flattened sections     apron    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE    Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines      CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 28    Module Specific Information       1756 0A8    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                                                                    A                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        
202. nd properly sized to match the individual load characteristics        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features 3 13       Field Power Loss Detection    The Field Power Loss detection feature is found on the following standard  output module     e 1756 OA8E    When field power to the module is lost  or zero cross cannot be detected  a  point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point faulted     Important  Only enable Field Power Loss detection for points that are in  use  If this feature is enabled for points that are not in use  you  will receive faults for those points during operation     For an example of how to enable Field Power Loss detection  see page 6 14       Diagnostic Latch of Information    The Diagnostic Latch of Information feature is found on the following  standard output module     e 1756 OA8E    Diagnostic Latching allows this module to latch a fault in the set position  once it has been triggered  even if the error condition causing the fault to  occur disappears     Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by the Reset Diagnostic Latch  service  For an example of how to enable or reset diagnostic latches  see    pagd 6 14     Important  Diagnostic latches are also reset through a software reset or  when the I O module   s power is cycled     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    3 14 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features    Fault and Status Reporting    Between Input Modu
203. ndicating  Device Specific Status  For Digital 1 0   0   Self Test  1   Flash update in progress  2   Communications fault  3   Not owned  4   Unused  5   Internal fault  module needs to be  flash updated   6   Run Mode  7   Program Mode  N A for input  modules   Bit8  O no fault  1 Minor recoverable  fault  e g  backplane error detected   Bit9  O no fault  1 Minor non recoverable fault  Bit10  O no fault  1 Major recoverable  fault  Bit1 1  O no fault  1 Major  non recoverable fault  e g  module needs  to be reflashed   Bits15 12  unused  Device   s serial number WHO_Information 1 0  WHO_serial_number 4  DINT  Number of characters in the text string    WHO_Information 14  WHO_string_length 1  SINT  Device   s ASCII text string describing the   WHO_Information 15  WHO_ascii_string 32       module                 Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    B 8 Using Ladder Logic       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    The table below lists tags used in the Source and Destination fields of the  Message Instructions              Table B C  Source and Destination Field Tags  Source Tag  Description   Enable_32_ Points Parameter used to determine which points are enabled  DINT for the service e g  If bit 0   1 for Reset Fuse  then point  0 has its electronic fuse reset   Results_32_Points Pass  0   Fail  1  result for the service i e  If bit 0   1 for  DINT the results of the Pulse Test  then the Pulse Test failed  for point 0           Communications Pop Up Screen    This pop up sc
204. ndicator  L1 0 20A   gt  AC OUTPUT  3  E ST 012345670  Z ST 8 9 10 111213 1415 k O  oA   Continuous   30  C 8  1A Continuous   60  C  0   43ms  41161M Time 40847 M 40459 M    Module Specific Information 7 27       1756 0A16l Specifications       Number of Outputs    16  individually isolated        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    300mA   5 1V dc  amp  2 5mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 1 6W                 Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  5 5W   60  C   Thermal Dissipation 18 76 BTU hr   Output Voltage Range 74 265V ac  47 63Hz   Output Current Rating  Per Point 2A maximum   30  C  amp  1A maximum   60  C  Linear derating   Per Module 5A maximum   30  C  amp  4A maximum   60  C  Linear derating        Surge Current per Point    20A for 43ms each  repeatable every 2s   60  C                      Minimum Load Current 10mA per point  Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 5V peak   2A  amp  6V peak   load current lt 50mA  Maximum Off State Leakage Current 3mA per point  Commutating Voltage 4V us for loads gt 50mA  0 2V us for loads lt 50mA    Output Delay Time   Off to on 9 3ms   60Hz  11ms   50Hz   On to off 9 3ms   60Hz  11ms   50Hz  Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum  reference to the Coordinated    System Time       Configurable Fault States per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Configurable States in Program Mode per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Maximum 
205. nected Group 0 B 1 Group 0  together on the module  For DC 0    I   OUT 3  example  DC COM can be D ID  connected to either terminal RTN OUT 0 l   RTN OUT 0  marked RTN OUT 1    KD D  DC 1        OUT 4  When you daisy chain from D    a group to another RTB  DC 1    ee  IEB OUT 5  always connect the daisy Group 1 6 Group 1  chain to the terminal up DC 1    ic ie  OUT 6 sie  directly connected to the l i  supply wire  as shown  DC 1    ic ic OUT 7  2 19  This wiring example shows ae B ib  RIN OUT  lt 13  a single voltage source  a  Daisy chain to  other RTBs  DC COM 40182 M  Simplified schematic 6 014  Surge Current Chart LED indicator   gt   Surge   5V   P Gii   gt  DC OUTPUT  Gr  0    7     p  Continuous 3  Z  RIN E   60  C 8101234567 g  Vg oro S    K  kd    Px  8    lt      ControlBus Interface    Display t  0 Time 10ms    30347 M 40849 M 40466 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Module Specific Information 7 47       1756 0C8 Specifications       Number of Outputs    8  4 points common        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    165mA   5 1V dc  amp  2mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 0 89W                                   Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  4 9W   60  C  Thermal Dissipation 16 71 BTU hr  On State Voltage Range 30 60V dc  Output Current Rating  Per Point 2A maximum   60  C  Per Module 8A maximum   60  C  Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each  repeatable every 1s   60  C  Minimum Load Current 2mA per point  Maxi
206. nel to channel    100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between channels                 User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  Cage clamp  4 4 inch pounds  0 4Nm  maximum  RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB  1756 TBCH or TBS6H         Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB    1 8 inch  3 2mm  maximum       Environmental Conditions          Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22    14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 123  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous    lt n gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous     C     marked for all applicable directives       kwon 4    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 40 Module Specific Information       NOTES  When you daisy chain from  a group 
207. ng conditions that may occur depending on  the module   s Major Revision     e Ifthe module has a Major Revision   1  it will always return a positive  timestamping value     e Ifthe module has a Major Revision  gt  2  it will return a negative  timestamping value until the module is synchronized with the  owner controller and the first Change of State condition occurs            For more information        ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 7    Look at the Module Properties page of RSLogix 5000 to determine if the  module has been synchronized with the owner controller and whether the  controller is synchronized with the CST     For more information on synchronizing owner controllers and modules  with the CST  see the Logix5550 Controller User Manual   publication 1756 6 5 12     Producer Consumer Model    By using the Producer Consumer model  ControlLogix I O modules can  produce data without having been polled by a controller first  The modules  produce the data and any other owner controller device can decide to  consume it     For example  a diagnostic input module produces data and any number of  processors can consume the data at the same time  This eliminates the need    for one processor to send the data to another processor  For a more detailed  explanation of this process  see Chapte    LED Status Information   Each ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O module has an LED indicator on  the front of the module that allows you to check the module hea
208. njury     The RTB is designed to support Removal and Insertion  Under Power  RIUP   However  when you remove or  insert an RTB with field side power applied  unintended  machine motion or loss of process control can occur   Exercise extreme caution when using this feature  It is  recommended that field side power be removed before  removing the module     1  Unlock the locking tab at the top of the module   2  Open the RTB door using the bottom tab   3  Hold the spot marked PULL HERE and pull the RTB off the module     Important  Do not wrap your fingers around the entire door  A shock  hazard exists                                                                    20855 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    5 10 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module    Removing the Module from 1  Push in the top and bottom locking tabs   the Chassis                            Locking tabs                         20856 M    2  Pull module out of the chassis     m _ 0     ose 32 8 EE GANN  on A    q eee VS k sss N  N    SEs Se Sie Nn os BBs Ss    o  Xe Se    WSS N  l  EEN EEn                                                               20857 M    Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about   What   s Next  e installing the module  e keying the removable terminal block and the interface module  e connecting wiring  e assembling the removable terminal block and the housing  e    installing the removable terminal block or interface module onto the  module   removing the removabl
209. nly the number of bits appropriate for each  module   s density are used  For example  the 1756 OB8 module has a  Module Fault Word of 32 bits  But  because the module is an 8 point  module  only the first 8 bits  bits0 7  are used in the Module Fault Word     Fault bits in the Fuse Blown Word  Field Power Loss Word  No Load Word  and Output Verify Word are logically ORed into the Module Fault Word  In  other words  depending on the module type  a bit set in the Module Fault  Word can mean multiple things  It can indicate     e A communications fault   In this case  all 32 bits are set to 1  regardless  of the module   s density     e A fuse blown condition   In this case  only the bit affected  is set to 1     e A field power loss condition   In this case  only the bit affected is set to  1     e A no load condition   In this case  only the bit affected is set to 1     e An output verify condition   In this case  only the bit affected  is set to 1     ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 23       The following graphic provides an overview of the fault reporting process  on ControlLogix digital output modules        Bit 31 Bit 0  Module Fault Word 1 1 1 1                                                                                                          A communications fault sets all bits in the Module Fault Word  t A    A Fuse Blown  Field Power Loss  No Load or Output Verify  condition sets the appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word   oe Group 1 Gro
210. nning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations   FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     a wn       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 22 Module Specific Information       1756 IN16    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                 Feature Default value Page of description  Standard change of state OFF ON  Enabled 2 4  ON OFF  Enabled  Input filter time OFF ON  1ms 3 8  ON OFF  9ms  Communications format Input data             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module        L1    NOTES  All terminals with the same name are L2  connected together on the module   For example  L2 can be connected to    any terminal marked L2 0     When you daisy chain from a group to  another RTB  always connect the daisy  chain to the terminal directly connected  to the supply wire  as shown     This wiring example shows a single  voltage source                                                                                                                                            Sbbhbbrbbibiboe    elelelelelelelelele                                                                         
211. nor revision of the module  must greater than or equal to that of the configured slot              Connection The communication mechanism from the controller to  another module in the control system   ControlBus The backplane used by the 1756 chassis   Coordinated system Timer value which is kept synchronized for all modules   time  CST  within a single ControlBus chassis       Direct connection    An 1 0 connection where the controller establishes an  individual connection with 1 0 modules          Disable keying An electronic keying protection mode that requires no  attributes of the physical module and the module  configured in the software to match   Download The process of transferring the contents of a project on    the workstation into the controller       About This User Manual P 3          Electronic keying    A feature where modules can be requested to perform an  electronic check to make sure that the physical module is  consistent with what was configured by the software             Exact match An electronic keying protection mode that requires the  physical module and the module configured in the  software to match according to vendor  catalog number   major revision and minor revision   Field side Interface between user field wiring and 1 0 module   Inhibit A ControlLogix process that allows you to configure an    1 0 module but prevent it from communicating with the  owner controller  In this case  the controller behaves as if  the 1 0 module does not exist at 
212. not used when writing configuration but are only accessed during online  monitoring     These screens are accessed through the module   s properties           E Module Properties   Local 2  1756 IB16D 2 1   x     General  Connection   Module Info   Configuration Diagnostics   Backplane      Status  Running          Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 21       Output Online Services Diagnostic output modules have additional pages of diagnostic services   The following three diagnostics    e Electronic Fuse reset  e Reset Latched Diagnostics  e Pulse Test    are not used when writing configuration but are only accessed during online  monitoring     These screens are accessed through the module   s properties     E Module Properties   Local 3  1756 OA8D 2 1     Reset Electronic Fuses here    Reset Latched Diagnostics here       E Module Properties   Local 3  1756 O0A8D 2 1        Gavel cennecin   Moss canst iano panai    Eg    Perform Pulse Tests here    aa          Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    6 22 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules       Viewing and Changing  Module Tags    1 Select Controller Tags   2 Click on the right mouse   button to display the menu   3  Select Monitor Tags    Click on the slot number of  the module you want to see    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    When you create a module  a set of tags are created by the ControlLogix  system that can be viewed in the Tag Editor of RSLogix 5000  Each  configurable feature o
213. o o d        oF                            40200 M    ControlBus connector   The backplane connector interface for the  ControlLogix system connects the module to the ControlBus backplane     Connectors pins   Input output  power and grounding connections are  made to the module through these pins with the use of an RTB or IFM     Locking tab   The locking tab anchors the RTB or IFM cable on the  module  maintaining wiring connections     Slots for keying   Mechanically keys the RTB to prevent inadvertently  making the wrong wire connections to your module     Status indicators   Indicators display the status of communication  module  health and input output devices  Use these indicators to help in    troubleshooting     Top and bottom guides   Guides provide assistance in seating the RTB or  IFM cable onto the module     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    1 4 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules        Using Module Identification  and Status Information    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Each ControlLogix I O module maintains specific identification  information that separates it from all other modules  This information  assists you in tracking all the components of your system     For example  you can track module identification information to be aware  of exactly what modules are located in any ControlLogix rack at any time   While retrieving module identity  you can also retrieve the module   s status     Each module maintains the following information     T
214. of safety  considerations        ATTENTION  Identifies information about practices or  circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death   property damage or economic loss    Attention statements help you to   e identify a hazard   e avoid a hazard   e recognize the consequences    Important  Identifies information that is critical for successful application  and understanding of the product     Allen Bradley is a trademark of Rockwell Automation    European Communities  EC   Directive Compliance    If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the  European Union and EEA regions  It has been designed and tested to meet  the following directives     EMC Directive    This product is tested to meet the Council Directive 89 336 EC  Electromagnetic Compatibility  EMC  by applying the following standards   in whole or in part  documented in a technical construction file     e EN 50081 2 EMC     Generic Emission Standard  Part 2     Industrial  Environment    e EN 50082 2 EMC     Generic Immunity Standard  Part 2     Industrial  Environment    This product is intended for use in an industrial environment     Low Voltage Directive    This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73 23 EEC Low Voltage   by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131 2 Programmable  Controllers  Part 2   Equipment Requirements and Tests  For specific  information required by EN 61131 2  see the appropriate sections in this  publication  as well as the Allen Bradley p
215. oints  Input Points Output Points  Conditions Open wire Fuse blown  Setting a Field power loss No load  Fault Bit  1756 IA8D only  Output verify    Field power loss   1756 OA8D only           Using these bits in tandem with    data echo    and manually performing a  pulse test can help to further isolate the fault     See Table 4 B for possible diagnostic faults on the 1756 OA8D module              Table 4 B   1756 OA8D Diagnostic Fault Table  Ladder Commands the Output to be ON  Ladder Commands Output to be OFF  Possible Cause   of Fault   1  Output Data Echo returns the state of 1  Output Data Echo returns the state of Output is shorted  2  Fuse Blown bit is set  2  Pulse Test fails   1  Output Data Echo returns the state of 1  Output Data Echo returns the state of No Load or output is  the output as ON  the output as OFF  shorted to L1    2  Pulse Test fails     2  No Load bit is set        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999                                     4 10 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features  Table 4 B  1756 OA8D Diagnostic Fault Table   Ladder Commands the Output to be ON  Ladder Commands Output to be OFF  Possible Cause   of Fault    1  Output Data Echo returns the state of 1  Output Data Echo returns the state of L1 or L2 are  the output as OFF  the output as OFF  disconnected or   2  No Load shows a Fault  2  No Load bit is set  outside the 47 63Hz   3  Field Power Loss shows a Fault  3  Field Power Loss bit is set  frequency range   4  Pulse T
216. on     when product or packaging is marked        W   e    PROVED    Class   Div 2 Hazardous       marked for all applicable directives       a wan 4    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 36          Module Specific Information    1756 0B16E    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                    Feature Default value Page of description  Communications format CST timestamped fuse data    output data  Program mode Off  Program to fault transition Disabled  Fault mode Off 6 11             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  2    oum     EB ES  our o  Ee  OUT 3 i H IL      OUT 2  OIR  Group 0 OUT 5 i        OUT 4 Group 0  WG  HE  OUT 7 ie ie OUT 6  NOTES
217. on and the module itself  The number and type of choices varies  depending on which input module you are using and whether it is in a local  or remote chassis     When you select a Listen only Communications Format  only the General  and Connection tabs appear when you view a module   s properties in  RSLogix 5000     Input Module Formats    The following are possible Communications Format choices for  input modules     e input data   module returns only general fault and input data    e CST timestamped input data   module returns input data with the  value of the system clock  from its local chassis  when the input  data changed    e Full diagnostic input data   module returns input data  the value of the  system clock  from its local chassis  when the input data changed  and  diagnostic data  diagnostic modules only     e Rack optimization   the 1756 CNB module collects all digital input  words in the remote chassis and sends them to the controller as a single  rack image  This connection type limits the status and diagnostic  information available    These additional Communications Format choices are used by controllers  that want to listen to an input module but not own it  The choices have the  same definition as those above     Listen only   input data   Listen only   CST timestamped input data  Listen only   full diagnostic input data  Listen only   rack optimization    Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 6 7       For example  the screen below shows the 
218. onnected  to the output module has executed the command  If your application  requires a more detailed response than only acknowledging the receipt of a  command  see the Output Verify feature of diagnostic output modules   defined in Chaptef 4     Field Wiring Options    As with input modules  ControlLogix output modules provide isolated or  non isolated wiring options  I O modules provide point to point   group to group  or channel to channel wiring isolation  Your specific  application will determine what type of isolation is necessary and which  output module to use     Important  Although some ControlLogix I O modules provide  non isolated field side wiring options  each I O module  maintains internal electrical isolation between the system side  and field side     Multiple Point Densities    ControlLogix output modules use either 8  16  or 32 point densities for  greater flexibility in your application     ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features 3 11    Fusing    Some digital outputs have internal electronic or mechanical fusing to  prevent too much current from flowing through the module  This feature  protects the module from electrical damage  Other modules require  external fusing     Reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 configuration software or    through ladder logic running on a controller  For an example of how to  reset an electronic fuse  see page  6 21     Important  Electronic fuses are also reset through a software reset or when  the out
219. ord can mean multiple things  It  can indicate     e A communications fault   In this case  all 32 bits are set to 1  regardless  of the module   s density     e A field power loss condition   In this case  only the bit s  affected is  set to 1     e An open wire condition   In this case  only the bit s  affected is set to 1     ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 21       The following graphic provides an overview of the fault reporting process  on ControlLogix digital input modules                                                                                                                 Bit 31 Bit 0   Module Fault Word 1 1  All modules   A communications fault sets all bits in the Module i   Fault Word  A Field Power Loss or Open Wire condition   sets the appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word    Group 1 Group 0   Field Power Loss Word 1                                                                                                          1756 IA8D onl  A loss of field power sets the bit s  for that group    in the Field Power Loss Word and also sets the  appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word                                                                                                                   Open Wire Word 1  An open wire condition on any point sets the bit  for that point in the Open Wire Word and also sets  the appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word  41456  Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modul
220. ously established Check controller and  communication has timed   chassis communication   out    OK Red light The module must be Replace the module   replaced    1 0 State Yellow The input is active  None   1 0 Fault Red A fault has occurred for Check this point at the  this point  controller                 Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    8 2       1756 I1B16D       E    ST 01234567    FLT 01234567 0  ST 8 9 10111213 1415  FLT 8 9 10111213 1415    DIAGNOSTIC       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999       Troubleshooting Your Module    LED M    The following LED indicators are used with ControlLogix modules     1756 IA8D    1756 1B161  IH161  1B16  1C16             gt   AC INPUT    ST 01234567 oO be  FLT 01234567 K       DIAGNOSTIC  1756 IB32          Module  Status    20927 M          ST 01234567    stgg 111111    11  ST 67    22  ST 45              DC INPUT    a  ST 01234567 oF  8    ST 8 9 10111213 1415 K    20945 M    1756 1A16  IA16I  IM161  IN16       30082 M       LED indicators for output modules           AC INPUT    ST 01234567 0  K    ST 8 9 10111213 1415    20941 M                            LED This display  Means  Take this action    indicators   OK Steady green light The outputs are actively None  being controlled by a  system processor    OK Flashing green light   The module has passed None  internal diagnostics but is  not actively controlled or it  is inhibited    OK Flashing red light Previously established Check controller and  communication has time
221. pendix provides an  example of how to reset the same fuse without using RSLogix 5000     In addition to performing run time services  you can use ladder logic to  change configuration  Chapter 6 fxplained how to use the RSLogix 5000  software to set configuration parameters in your ControlLogix analog I O  module  Some of those parameters may also be changed through   ladder logic     In ladder logic  you can use Message instructions to send occasional  services to any ControlLogix I O module  Message instructions send an  explicit service to the module  causing specific behavior to occur  for  example  unlatching a high alarm     Message instructions maintain the following characteristics     e messages use unscheduled portions of system  communications bandwidth      one service is performed per instruction   e performing module services does not impede module functionality  such  as sampling inputs or applying new outputs    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    B 2 Using Ladder Logic       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Processing Real Time Control and Module Services    Services sent via message instructions are not as time critical as the module  behavior defined during configuration and maintained by a real time  connection  Therefore  the module processes messaging services only after  the needs of the I O connection have been met     For example  you may want to unlatch all process alarms on the module  but  real time control of your process is still occurring
222. proved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 56 Module Specific Information    Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about module specific information     What   s Next  Move on to Chapter  8 fo learn how to troubleshoot your module     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    What This Chapter Contains    Using Indicators to    Troubleshoot Your Module    Chapter 8    Troubleshooting Your Module    This chapter describes the indicators on the ControlLogix digital modules  and how to use them to troubleshoot the module  The following table  describes what this chapter contains and its location     See page    ei        For information about   Using Indicators to Troubleshoot Your                Module O  Using RSLogix 5000 to Troubleshoot Your 8 4  Module   Chapter Summary and What   s Next 8 5       Each ControlLogix I O module has indicators which show individual I O  state  yellow   fault  or fuse status  red   A bi colored LED indicates  module status with an    OK     red green   LED indicators are located on the  front of the module     LED indicators for input modules                         LED This display  Means  Take this action    indicators    OK Green light The inputs are being None  multicast and in normal  operating state    OK Flashing green light   The module has passed None  internal diagnostics but is  not multicasting inputs or  it is inhibited    OK Flashing red light Previ
223. put module is power cycled     The following modules use electronic fusing     e 1756 OA8E  e 1756 OB16E  e 1756 OB8EI    See Table 3 A to determine what fuse to use in your application     Table 3 A    Recommended Fuses                                        Circuit   Catalog Number Fusing on the Module Recommended   Fuse Supplier  Type Fuse  AC 1756 0A8  None   Fused IFM is recommended   5x20mm SAN O Industry  to protect outputs 6 3A Corp   SOC  p n   See publication 1492 2 12  Medium lag MT 4 6 3A  1756 OA8E 3 Yes   Fused on a per point basis Electronically  fused  1756 0A16   4 5 Yes   Fused on a per group basis 5x20mm Littlefuse p n  3 15A H2153 15  Slo Blow  1500A  Interruption  current  1756 OA16I  None   Fused IFM is recommended   5x20mm SOC p n  to protect outputs 6 3A MT 4 6 3A   See publication 1492 2 12  Medium lag  1756 ON8 None   Fused IFM is recommended   5x20mm SOC p n  to protect outputs 6 3A MT 4 6 3A   See publication 1492 2 12  Medium lag  DC 1756 0B8   None   Fused IFM is recommended   5x20mm SOC p n  to protect outputs 4A MQ2 4A   See publication 1492 2 12  Quick acting  1756 OB8EI2  3  Yes   Fused on a per point basis Electronically  fused       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    3 12    ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features                                              Table 3 A  Recommended Fuses  Circuit   Catalog Number Fusing on the Module Recommended   Fuse Supplier  Type Fuse  DC 1756 OB16E2  3  6 Yes   Fused on a per group basis El
224. r Clear All                      Cancel   Help         2  Click here    You enter the new module creation wizard     Module Properties   Local  1756 08 1 1  xi  Type  1756 048 8 Point 74V 265V AC Output  Vendor  Allen Bradley  Parent  Local  1  Enter an optional name          eNe    2  Enter an optional description                      Description     3  Choose a Communications                Comm Format   Output Data o    Format  A detailed  explanation of this field is  provided on the next page      Revision     4      Conveyor Slot  fi      z    5 Choose an Electronic  Electronic Keying   Compatible Module z  Keying method   A  detailed explanation of  Make sure the this field is provided on  Minor Revision   the page 6 9    number matches   _ lt Beck   ne       the label on the  side of your module    EE       If you are altering the  default configuration   click here    Go to pagd 6 10     If you are using  default configuration   click here and you  are finished  configuring your  module    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    6 6 Configuring Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Communications Format    The communications format determines what type of configuration options  are made available  what type of data is transferred between the module and  its owner controller  and what tags are generated when configuration   is complete     This feature also defines the connection between the controller writing the  configurati
225. r RTB                 5 4  Assembling The Removable Terminal Block and the Housing   5 5  Choosing the Extended Depth Housing                     5 6  Suggestions for Using the Extended Depth Housing        5 7  Cabinet Size Considerations When Using the  Extended Depth Housing                      0 00 eee 5 7  Installing the Removable Terminal Block                    5 8  Removing the Removable Terminal Block                   5 9  Removing the Module from the Chassis                    5 10  Chapter Summary and What   s Next                  04   5 10    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Configuring Your ControlLogix  Digital 1 0 Modules    Module Specific Information    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Chapter 6  What This Chapter Contains   22 2502 2b  apenas Gee eG ee eg 6 1  Configuring Your I O Module                       0000  6 1  RSLogix 5000 Configuration Software                   6 2  Overview of the Configuration Process                      6 2  Creating a New Module 224 2scace den vie be ebene foe eee  6 4  Communications Format           0 0 0    eee eee eee 6 6  Electronic Keying nc cue boa trays oo nae Bore eae t 6 9  Using the Default Configuration                      0   6 10  Altering the Default Configuration                        6 10  Configuring a Standard Input Module                      6 12  Configuring a Standard Output Module                     6 12  Configuring a Diagnostic Input Module                    6 13  Configuring a Dia
226. r controller sends it  backplane transfer times are small      lan A  Owner controller     Output module    oO                   oOo  Oo  oO                            o                                           Data sent from owner at the end o    every program scan and the RPI                      OED                                                                                40949                Depending on the value of the RPI  with respect to the length of the  program scan  the output module can receive and    echo    data multiple  times during one program scan     If an output module physically resides in a chassis other than that of the  owner controller  i e  a remote chassis connected via ControlNet   the  owner controller sends data to the output module only at the RPI rate  specified  Updates are not performed at the end of the controller   s program  scan     In addition  the role of the RPI for a remote output module changes slightly   with respect to getting data from the owner controller     When an RPI value is specified for an output module in a remote chassis  in  addition to instructing the owner controller to multicast the output data  within its own chassis  the RPI also    reserves    a spot in the stream of data  flowing across the ControlNet network     Digital 1 0 Operation Within the ControlLogix System 2 9       The timing of this    reserved    spot may or may not coincide with the exact  value of the RPI  but the control system will guarante
227. r defined rate at which the module  updates the information sent to its owner controller  This is also known  as Cyclic Data Transfer     e Change of State   configurable feature that  when enabled  instructs the  module to update its owner controller with new data whenever a  specified input point transitions from ON to OFF or OFF to ON  The  data will be sent at the RPI rate  By default  this setting is always enabled  for input modules     For a more detailed explanation of these features  see page 2 4      Software Configurable Filter Times    ON to OFF and OFF to ON filter times can be adjusted through   RSLogix 5000 software for all ControlLogix input modules  These filters  improve noise immunity within a signal  A larger filter value affects the  length of delay times for signals from these modules     For an example of how to set filter times  see pages    ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features 3 9       Using Features Specific to  Standard Output Modules    Isolated and Non lsolated Varieties of Modules    ControlLogix input modules provide isolated or non isolated wiring  options  Some applications require power for the I O circuits to originate  on separate  isolated  power sources  Because these conditions require  separate commons for each channel  some input modules utilize individual  isolation  or point to point isolation     Other types of isolation available with ControlLogix input modules are  channel to channel isolation and no isolation  Your 
228. racteristics of an applied short circuit  an output verify fault could be set until the short circuit is detected by the module and the output is turned OFF    6  During normal operating conditions  hardware damage should not be possible  An output shorted to GND may temporarily cause a hardware point fault  See output shorted to GND    as a possible cause        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Using Features Specific to  Diagnostic Input Modules    ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 11    The following features are available on all ControlLogix diagnostic digital  input modules     Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time  Your ControlLogix input module will send data in one of two ways        Requested Packet Interval   a user defined rate at which the module  updates the information sent to its owner controller  This is also known  as Cyclic Data Transfer     e Change of State   configurable feature that  when enabled  instructs the  module to update its owner controller with new data whenever a  specified input point transitions from ON to OFF or OFF to ON  The  data will be sent at the RPI rate  The default setting for this feature is  always enabled     For a more detailed explanation of these features  see page 2 4     Software Configurable Filter Times    ON to OFF and OFF to ON filter times can be adjusted through   RSLogix 5000 software for all ControlLogix diagnostic input modules   These filters improve noise immunity within 
229. rcing wiring     For more information on compatibility of other Allen Bradley Company  products to ControlLogix input modules  see the I O Systems Overview   publication CIG 2 1     ControlLogix output modules may be used to drive a variety of output  devices  Typical output devices compatible with the ControlLogix outputs  include     e motor starters  e solenoids  e indicators    When designing a system  make sure that the ControlLogix outputs can  supply the necessary surge and continuous current for proper operation   Take care to make sure that the surge and continuous current are not  exceeded  Damage to the module could result     When sizing output loads  check the documentation supplied with the  output device for the surge and continuous current needed to operate the  device     The ControlLogix outputs are capable of directly driving the ControlLogix  inputs  The exceptions are the ac and dc diagnostic input modules  When  diagnostics are used a shunt resistor is required for leakage current  See  chapter 6 for more information     For more information on the compatibility of motor starters to ControlLogix  output modules  see Appendix D      For more information on compatibility of other Allen Bradley Company  products to ControlLogix output modules  see the I O Systems Overview   publication CIG 2 1     Using Features Common to  ControlLogix Diagnostic  Digital 1 0 Modules    ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 3    The following features are co
230. rectly connected to the De     GS E    our 7  supply wire  as shown  20 y  RTNOUT 1    ED IEB    RTN our  1  This wiring example shows   o  a single voltage source  CA  Daisy chain to  other RTBs  DC COM 40181 M  Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator  DC 0     D Surge  sv     4A G gt  DC OUTPUT  PAN OUT 0  3   ia i   eas ST01234567 3    ZA RTN S   60  C 0  Veg out o 57A   K         6    lt      ControlBus Interface     lt i   _ Display t  0  30347 M Time me 40849 M 40466 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Module Specific Information 7 43       1756 OB8 Specifications       Number of Outputs    8  4 points common        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    165mA   5 1V dc  amp  2mA   24V de   Total backplane power 0 89W                                   Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  2 5W   60  C  Thermal Dissipation 8 53 BTU hr  Output Voltage Range 10 30V dc  Output Current Rating  Per Point 2A maximum   60  C  Per Module 8A maximum   60  C  Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each  repeatable every 1s   60  C  Minimum Load Current 2mA per point  Maximum On State Voltage Drop 2V dc   2A  Maximum Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point  Output Delay Time  Off to on 1ms maximum  On to off 2ms maximum  Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum  reference to the CST       Configurable Fault States per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Configurable States in Program Mode per 
231. reen provides information on the path of the message  instruction  For example  the slot number of a 1756 OA8D module  distinguishes exactly which module a message is designated for     Important  Use the Browse button to see a list of the I O modules in the  system  You choose a path when you choose a module from  the list     You must name an I O module during initial module  configuration to choose a path for your message instruction     Message Configuration   Slot4_Ch0O_Reset_Fuse x                 Configuration Communication    Path   Slot4_OA8D     Use this Browse  Slot4_OA8D button to see a  Communication Method list such as the    CIP    DH  Channel   z   Destination Link l   one displayed  f  Source Link l 4 Destination Node  l 4  Octal  below           V Cache Connections e            O Enable    Enable Waiting O Start    Done     Error Coc I Timed Out       Done Length  0       Extended Error Code     OK   Cancel   Apply   Help         i Module Browser  x   Module Name   Slot4_O48D    5 8 1 0 Configuration  J 1  1756 4161 Slott_1A161     2 1756 1832 Slot2_1B32     3  1756 0B16E Slot3_OB16E  5 Slat4_OABD        Using Ladder Logic B 9       Using Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs    This example demonstrates the use of timestamped inputs and scheduled  outputs for digital I O  The CST can be utilized to synchronize the output  turning OFF to ON based upon the time that the input transitioned OFF to  ON  The program can be extended to include synchronizing mul
232. rolLogix diagnostic I O modules provide  non isolated field side wiring options  each I O module  maintains internal electrical isolation between the system side  and field side     Multiple Point Densities    ControlLogix diagnostic output modules use either 8  16  or 32 point  densities for greater flexibility in your application     ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 15       Fusing    Diagnostic digital outputs have internal electronic to prevent too much  current from flowing through the module  This feature protects the module  from electrical damage  Other modules require external fusing     Reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 configuration software or  through ladder logic running on a controller  For an example of how to reset  an electronic fuse  see pag e  6 21     Important  Electronic fuses are also reset through a software reset or when  the diagnostic output module is power cycled              Table 4 D   Recommended Fuses  Circuit Catalog Number Fusing on the Module Recommended Fuse  Type  AC 1756 OA8D   2 Yes   Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused  DC 1756 0B16D  2 3 Yes   Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused                     Electronic protection is not intended to replace fuses  circuit breakers  or other code required wiring protection devices   2  The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions  The protection is based on  a 
233. s  See pub  1492 2 12    Output Delay Time Isolation Voltage   Off to on 13ms maximum Channel to channel 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  On to off 13ms maximum  265V ac maximum continuous voltage    between channels                             User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Configurable Fault States  Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum   per Point default  reference to the Coordinated System Time  Configurable States in Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the RTB Screw Torque 4 4 inch pounds  0 4Nm  maximum  Program Mode per Point   default   Cage clamp   Module Keying Software configurable Screwdriver Blade Width 1 8 inch  3 2mm  maximum   Backplane  for RTB  RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying Conductors  Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm  stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 423  RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB  1756 TBCH or TBSGH   Agency Certification      D   when product or packaging  is marked   e Class   Div 2 Hazardous    lt fm gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous         marked for all applicable directives  T Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   3 Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines     4    CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations   FM ap
234. stic mechanical backplane keys  electronic keying allows the  ControlLogix system to control what modules belong in the various slots of  a configured system     During module configuration  you must choose one of the following keying  options for your I O module     e Exact match   all of the parameters described below must match or the  inserted module will reject a connection to the controller    e Compatible match   all of the parameters described below  except  minor revision must match or the inserted module will reject a  connection to the controller     In this case  the minor revision of the module must be greater than or  equal to that of the configured slot     e Disable keying   the inserted module will accept a connection to the  controller regardless of its type    ATTENTION  Be extremely cautious when using the  disable keying option  if used incorrectly  this option can  lead to personal injury or death  property damage or  economic loss     When an I O module is inserted into a slot in a ControlLogix chassis  the  module compares the following information for itself to that of the  configured slot it is entering     Vendor   Product Type  Catalog Number  Major Revision  Minor Revision    This feature can prevent the inadvertent operation of a control system with  the wrong module in the wrong slot     ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features 3 5    Using the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs    Controllers generate a 64 bit Coordi
235. structions 1756 5 2    A7   A10     A13   1756 Series ControlLogix Module Installation Instructions 1756 5 5 to   Each module has separate document for 1756 5 42  installation     1756 L1  Logix 5550 Processor User Manual 1756 6 5 12    L1M1     L1M2   1756 DHRIO ControlLogix Data Highway Plus Communication 1756 6 5 14  Interface Module User Manual   1756 ENET ControlLogix Ethernet Communication Interface 1756 6 5 1  Module User Manual   1756 Series ControlLogix Analog 1 0 Modules User Manual 1756 6 5 9       If you need more information on these products  contact your local  Allen Bradley integrator or sales office for assistance  For more information  on the documentation  refer to the Allen Bradley Publication Index     publication SD499     About This User Manual P 5       Rockwell Automation Support    Rockwell Automation offers support services worldwide  with over 75  sales support offices  512 authorized distributors and 260 authorized  systems integrators located throughout the United States alone  as well as  Rockwell Automation representatives in every major country in the world     Local Product Support   Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for   sales and order support   product technical training    warranty support  support service agreements    Technical Product Assistance    If you need to contact Rockwell Automation for technical assistance  please  review the troubleshooting information in Appendix  A first  If the problem  persists  then 
236. sy chain to          DC 6    26   29 V i  When you daisy chain to otherRTBS    lt  et g E A f  other RTBs  always    _ e an V T  connect the daisy chain to a oe BIN OUR      ICDs  31E OUT 7  the terminal directly Daisy chain to Not used       amp   34 33 E Not used  connected to the supply other RTBs Not used   9  sQ Not used  wire  as shown              DC COM  40169 M  Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator  Surge  4A  DC 0       ED    gt  DC OUTPUT  VYark    K Continuous 3  2A   60  C ST01234567 0                         oO  Cc          Current          FUSE 01234567 K                                                                      N Display ELECTRONICALLY FUSED    ControlBus Interface       10ms  Time    40849 M 40467 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Module Specific Information 7 45       1756 OB8El Specifications       Number of Outputs    8  individually isolated        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    250mA   5 1V dc  amp  2mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 1 32W                                      Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  A7W   60  C  Thermal Dissipation 16 03 BTU hr  Output Voltage Range 10 30V dc  Output Current Rating  Per Point 2A maximum   60  C  Per Module 8A maximum   60  C  Surge Current per Point 4A for 10ms each  repeatable every 2s  Minimum Load Current 3mA per point  Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 2V dc   2A  Maximum Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point  Output Delay Tim
237. t data     Important  The table below lists all possible standard input module tags  In  each application  though  the series of tags varies  depending on    how the module is configured     Configuration Tags          Table A A  Standard Input Module Configuration Tags  Name  as listed in Configuration Definition   the Tag Editor   or 1 0 Data   COSOnOffEn Configuration Change of State ON to OFF     Triggers an event in the controller for ON to   1bit per point  OFF transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data    table as soon as possible  The CST timestamp is also updated   O disable  1 enable    COS OffOnEn Configuration Change of State OFF to ON     Triggers an event in the controller for OFF to   1 bit per point  ON transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data  table as soon as possible  The CST timestamp is also updated    O disable  1 enable          FilterOnOff_0_7 etc    Configuration Filter Times ON to OFF     Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules   1 byte per group  for ON to OFF transition  Operates on groups of 8 points    Valid DC filter times 0  1  2  9  18ms   Valid AC filter times 1  2ms    FilterOffOn_0_7 etc    Configuration Filter Times OFF to ON     Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules   1 byte per group  for OFF to ON transition  Operates on groups of 8 points    Valid DC filter times 0  1  2ms   Valid AC filter times 1  2ms                Publication 1756 6 5 8 
238. ta to the owner controller when one of three  events occurs        Requested Packet Interval   a user defined rate at which the module  updates the information sent to its owner controller    e Change of State   configurable feature that  when enabled  instructs the  module to update its owner controller with new data whenever a  specified input point transitions from ON to OFF or OFF to ON  The  transitioned input data is sent with the next RPI update     e Diagnostic Change of State   any change in the diagnostics for a  particular input point    Although the RPI occurs continuously  this COS feature allows you to  decide whether changes in a module   s diagnostic detection should cause the  module to send real time data to the owner controller     If this feature is enabled  the input module sends new data to the owner  controller at the RPI  on input COS if it is enabled  and if a diagnostic fault  occurs     If this feature is disabled  real time data is not sent when a diagnostic fault  occurs but is still sent at the specified RPI or on input COS if it is enabled     The following features are common to all ControlLogix diagnostic digital  output modules     Configurable Point Level Output Fault States    Individual outputs can be independently configured to unique fault states   either ON  OFF or Last State in case of a communications failure or  program mode     Important  Whenever you inhibit a diagnostic output module  it enters the  program mode and all outputs ch
239. tails    The resulting current is then expected to exist when the input is open     When an Open Wire condition is detected  a point level fault is sent to the  controller to identify the exact point fault  This feature has a corresponding  tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault  For  more information on these tags  see Appendi    Important  If this feature is enabled for points that are not in use  you will  receive faults for those points during operation     For an example of how to enable the Open Wire detection diagnostic     see page    Field Power Loss Detection  Field Power Loss is only found on the 1756 IA8D module     When field power to the module is lost  a point level fault is sent to the  controller to identify the exact point faulted  Only enable Field Power Loss  detection for points that are in use     This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user  program in the event of a fault  For more information on these tags  see    Appendix  A     Important  If this feature is enabled for points that are not in use  you will  receive faults for those points during operation     For an example of how to set the Field Power Loss detection diagnostic  see  page    Using Features Specific to  Diagnostic Output Modules    ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 13    Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules    If the Diagnostic Change of State feature is enabled  a diagnostic input  module sends new da
240. te Current 2 5mA  Maximum Input Impedance   265V ac 20 38kQ   60Hz  Input Delay Time  Off to on Programmable filter  1ms or 2ms  Hardware delay 10ms maximum plus filter time  On to off Programmable filter  9ms or 18ms  Hardware delay 8ms maximum and filter time  Diagnostic Functions  Change of state Software configurable  Time stamp of inputs     200us  Short Inrush Current 250mA peak  decaying to  lt 37  in 22ms  without activation   Cyclic Update Time User selectable  100us minimum 750ms maximum   Isolation Voltage  Channel to channel 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   265V ac maximum continuous voltage between channels   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  Cage clamp  4 4 inch pounds  0 4Nm  maximum  RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB  1756 TBCH or TBS6H    Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 423  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch  3 2mm  maximum  Agency Certification D   when product or packaging is marked    e Class   Div 2 Hazardous    lt  gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous          marked for all applicable directives       Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for pla
241. te except for a  mismatch in electronic keying that prevents normal operation     The controller maintains and monitors its connection with a module  Any  break in the connection  such as module faults or removal of the module  from the chassis while under power  causes the controller to set fault status  bits in the data area associated with the module  The RSLogix 5000  software monitors this data area to annunciate the modules    failures     Important  While a Logix5550 controller allows up to 250 bidirectional  connections  each individual I O module allows 16  bidirectional connections     In traditional I O systems  controllers poll input modules to obtain their  input status  Digital input modules in the ControlLogix system are not  polled by a controller  Instead  the modules multicast their data either upon  Change of State or periodically  The frequency depends on the options  chosen during configuration and where in the control system that input  module physically resides     Important  This is called the Producer Consumer model  The input module  is the producer of input data and the controller is the consumer  of the data     An input module   s behavior varies depending upon whether it operates in    the local chassis or in a remote chassis  The following sections detail the  differences in data transfers between these set ups     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    2 4 Digital 1 0 Operation Within the ControlLogix System    Input Modules in  a Local Chassis 
242. teetanads 4 12  Field Power Loss Detection ie etna wets hee wae naan 4 12  Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules            4 13  Using Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules        4 13  Configurable Point Level Output Fault States            4 13  Output  Data ECHO smes sen areri  ee eee tee T 4 14  Field Wiring Options ots e22seceheee seb ed bp iedeowas 4 14  Multiple Point Densities               0 0 00    0008  4 14  BUSING  yw POR ase ees See SR Sa ee Oak Sala eect 4 15  NO Load Detecti  n ies od iwia  ed aaa y hey ae ie 4 15  Field Side Output Verification                   00   4 16  PUSS CSU rt Ant itd fbn Rh T de cater Le ee 4 17  Point Level Electronic Fusing                    04   4 18  Loss of Field Power Detection                    004  4 19  Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules           4 19  Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules  and Controllers sossa soars 5 ated Oui h a aoe Gade we oN a aes 4 20  Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules  and Controllere saiia win Oe seers ete Sees  ew acces ore 4 21  Chapter Summary and What   s Next                  00   4 23  Chapter 5  What This Chapter Contains             0 0 0 0    eee eee 5 1  Installing the ControlLogix I O Module                     5 1  Keying the Removable Terminal Block                     5 2  Connecting WANES  5  6n3 ac4 b 0 op era acik eke Hawa  FR Rae 5 3  Three Types of RTBs  each RTB comes with housing        5 3  Recommendations for Wiring You
243. ter its  thermal cut out temperature has been reached  All other channels will continue to operate as directed by the module master  CPU  Bridge  etc     A fuse is provided on each common of this module for a total of 2 fuses  The fuses are designed to protect the module from short circuit conditions  The  fuse does not provide overload protection  In the event of an overload on an output channel  it is likely that the fuse will not blow and the output device  associated with that channel will be damaged  To provide overload protection for your application  user supplied fuses should be externally installed    If a short circuit condition occurs on any channel within this module   s group  the entire group is turned off    The module does not provide protection against reverse polarity wiring or wiring to AC power sources    The recommended fuse for this module has been sized to provide short circuit protection for wiring only to external loads  In the event of a short circuit on  an output channel  it is likely that the transistor or relay associated with that channel will be damaged and the module should be replaced or a spare  output channel used for the load  The fuse does not provide overload protection  In the event of an overload on an output channel  it is likely that the fuse  will not blow and the transistor or relay associated with that channel will be damaged  To provide overload protection for your application  user supplied  fuse should be installed externally a
244. that the module has accurately followed the processor   s instructions  the  module samples the field side state and compares it to the system side state     This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user  program in the event of a fault  For more information on these tags  see    Appendix A      If an output cannot be verified  a point level fault is sent to the controller   For an example of how to enable the Output Verify diagnostic  see    page  6 14       ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 4 17       Pulse Test    Pulse Test is a feature found on diagnostic output modules that can verify  output circuit functionality without actually changing the state of the output  load device  A short pulse is sent to the targeted output circuit  The circuit  should respond as it would if a real change of state command was issued   but the load device does not transition     Consider the following when using the Pulse Test     e Only use the test when the output state does not transition for long  periods of time  Normal diagnostics will catch faults if the outputs are  transitioning regularly     e When first performing the pulse test  it is recommended that you verify  the load will not transition  You should be at the actual load while the test  is performed     The Pulse Test can be used to perform a preemptive diagnosis of possible  future module conditions  For example  you can use Pulse Test to     e detect a blown fuse before it happens 
245. thermal cut out principle  In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel  that channel will limit the current within milliseconds after its  thermal cut out temperature has been reached  All other channels will continue to operate as directed by the module master  CPU  Bridge  etc    3  The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the module from short circuit conditions  The protections is based on  a thermal cut out principle  In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel  that channel will limit the current within milliseconds after its  thermal cut out temperature has been reached  Other channels could produce a false error on the output verify fault signal due to the supply dropping  below the minimum detect level of 19 2V dc  The output channels that are affected by this phenomena will continue to operate as directed by the module  master  CPU  Bridge  etc    What this means is that the output verify fault signals of the other channels should be checked and reset if a short circuit on one channel occurs        No Load Detection    For each output point  No Load detects the absence of field wiring or a  missing load from each output point in the off state only     The output circuit on a diagnostic output module has a Current Sense  optoisolator used in parallel with the output transistor  Current flows  through this sensing circuit only when the output is OFF  as shown in the  simplified diagram b
246. tic Functions  Change of state Software configurable    Time stamp of inputs        200us       Short Inrush Current    250mA peak  decaying to  lt 37  in 22ms  without activation        Cyclic Update Time    User selectable  100us minimum 750ms maximum        Reverse Polarity Protection    Yes       Isolation Voltage  Channel to channel    100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s     250V ac maximum continuous voltage between channels                    User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  Cage clamp  4 4 inch pounds  0 4Nm  maximum  RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 36 Position RTB  1756 TBCH or TBS6H    Environmental Conditions   Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F    Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F    Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing       Conductors Wire Size    22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum          Category 42 3  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 1 8 inch  3 2mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when product or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous    lt fm gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous     C     marked for all applicable directives       wana    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wirin
247. tiple  output modules by sending the same timestamp to all output modules     For this example  the output will follow the state of the input 0  but it will be  delayed by exactly 10ms  The advantage of using CST  over timers  is that  the synchronization is being performed at the I O module which eliminates  any jitter due to controller or communication delays     Your control becomes much more deterministic even under changing loads   For this synchronization to work properly  the 10ms delay must be long  enough to account for any controller  backplane  and network delays  The  input and output modules must reside in the same rack as a Time Master   i e  Controller  Timestamp units are secs     Rungs 0 and 1 are used to detect  the transition from PROGRAM to  RUN mode  This is used to turn ON     init    which causes the program to  initialize its tags    Rung 2 only executes once and        initializes the LastTimestamp   LastTimestamp is used to detect a  Change of State on the input point   by checking to see if the timestamp   of the input data has changed       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    B 10 Using Ladder Logic    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999       Rung 3 is the main rung which checks for Change of State on the input  point by comparing the current input timestamp  i e   Time_at_which_Input_Changed  with the last timestamp  i e   LastTimestamp      The input point  i e  point 0  must have Change of State enabled or the  timestamp will not update when t
248. tiple bits listed   Bit 0  0   Unowned  1   Owned  Bit 1  Reserved  Bit 2  0   Unconfigured  1   Configured  Bit 3  Reserved  Bits 7 4  Forms a 4 bit number indicating Device  Specific Status   0   Self Test  1   Flash update in progress  2   Communications fault  3   Not owned  outputs in prog  mode   4   unused  5   Internal fault  need flash update   6   Run mode  7   Program mode  output mods only   Bit 8  0   No fault  1   Minor recoverable fault  Bit 9  0   No fault  1   Minor unrecoverable fault  Bit 10  0   No fault  1   Major recoverable fault  Bit 11  0   No fault  1   Major unrecoverable fault  Bits 15 12  Unused  Rung 4   Vendor ID Module manufacturer vendor  1   Allen Bradley  Serial Number Module serial number  Rung 5   Length of ASCII Text String Number of characters in module   s text string       ASCIl Text String       Module   s ASCII text string description       Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    B 16 Using Ladder Logic       Using Tags in Ladder Logic    When using tags in ControlLogix digital I O ladder logic applications  you  must remember the following     e Ladder logic tags represent the module on a point per bit basis  For  example  point 0   bit 0 on the module    e Ifyou are performing a service through the tags  a value of 0 prevents  the action from occurring  and a value of 1 causes the action to occur   For example  if you want to reset the electronic fuse on a particular bit   enter 1 in the tags     e Ifyou are checking the response of 
249. to 9 fap   our 2  NOTES  All terminals with the same L     RTN OUT 2 Diz 1 4 OUT 2 Ny      name are connected DC 3    g 114 sig OUT 3  together on the module  RTN OUT 3 Qite 15 g OUT 3  For example  the load can Non isolated DC 4         eq  18 17  e OUT 4 h   be connected to either wiring 4 RTN OUT 4 G  20 19 OUT 4  terminal marked OUT 0           DC 5      apie 2G Ours                  e   7    RTNOUT 5     4 23 OUT 5  When you daisy chain to Daisy chain to   DC 6      J   25 OUT 6          other RTBs  always other RTBs o          RINOUT 6 28 27 OUT 6  connect the daisy chain to a          DC 7      Eo 29 OUT 7    l  the terminal directly g e   RTN OUT 7 ED  22 31   OUT 7  annete tomie Sune Daisy chain to Not used      J3 33  D Not used  wire  as shown  Not used   Not used  other RTBs De 35 D Or use  C             DC COM  40170 M  Simplified schematic Surge Current Chart LED indicator  sd Stirge  45V a   gt  DC OUTPUT  as OUT 0 3  C   D  Continuous  ilis z   60  C ST01234567 g  a 3 A RTN 2A L  V   OUT 0    K    J o      lt     ControlBus Interface    lt  Display t  0  30347 M Time Loms 40849 M 40466 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Module Specific Information    1756 OH8I Specifications    7 49          Number of Outputs    8  individually isolated        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    210mA   5 1V dc  amp  2mA   24V dc   Total backplane power 1 12W                                   Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  3 3W  
250. to another RTB   always connect the daisy  chain to the terminal  directly connected to the  supply wire  as shown     This wiring example uses a  single voltage source     Simplified schematic    1756 0B32    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                    Feature Default value Page of description  Communications format Output data  Program mode Off  Program to fault transition Disabled 6 11  Fault mode Off 6 11             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module                         5V    e q bar                                                ControlBus Interface    lt  Display             Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              M OUT 1 D2 1a OUT 0      OUT 3  Tex  4 3 OUT 2  OUT 5  Tale 5 OUT 4  OUT 7 je 7 OUT 6  Group 0 OUT 9  o 19 og OUT 8 Group 0  OUT 11   Jap  2 nk OUT 10  OUT 13 14 13 G  QUT 12  QUT 15 Dlis 15 4 OUT 14  DC 0    G   18 17 RTN OUT 0  OUT 17     G  20 19 OUT 16  OUT 19  1 22 29 OUT 18  OUT 21   24 23 OUT 20  OUT 23   JQ  26 35 QUT 22  Group 1 OUT 25  E 28 2 OUT 24 Group 1  QUT 27     G  30 29 OUT 26  OUT 29  E 32 31 G OUT 28  OUT 31  E  3
251. tures specific to ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules    Move to Chapter 5 fo learn about installing the ControlLogix I O module     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Chapter 5    Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module    What This Chapter Contains This chapter describes how to install ControlLogix modules  The following  table describes what this chapter contains and its location                                   For information about  See page    Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module   Keying the Removable Terminal Block 5 2   Connecting Wiring 5 3   Assembling The Removable Terminal 5 5   Block and the Housing   Installing the Removable Terminal Block 5 8   Removing the Removable Terminal Block 5 9   Removing the Module from the Chassis 5 10   Chapter Summary and What   s Next 5 10  Installing the ControlLogix You can install or remove the module while chassis power is applied   1 0 Module     A ATTENTION  The module is designed to support Removal    and Insertion Under Power  RIUP   However  when you  remove or insert an RTB with field side power applied   unintended machine motion or loss of process control can  occur  Exercise extreme caution when using this feature      SD 1  Align circuit  2 VV FS    Aea board with top    i   chassis guides                        Printed Circuit Board       20861 M    Slide module into  bottom chassis guides  chassis until module tabs    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    5 2 Installing the ControlLogix 1 0 Module  
252. ublication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 52    Module Specific Information       Display    Control Bus    Interface    NOTES  All terminals with the same name  are connected together on the  module  For example  L1 can be  connected to either terminal  marked L1 15     When you use the second L1 15  terminal to daisy chain to other  RTBs  always connect the daisy  chain to the terminal directly  connected to the supply wire   as shown     When using the jumper bar to  daisy chain terminals together as  shown  the maximum current you  may apply to the module through a  single contact point is 8A     The jumper bar part number is  97739201  Contact your local  Rockwell Automation sales  representative to order additional  jumper bars  if necessary     1756 OW16I    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                                                                                                                                                                                                                       Feature Default value Page of description  Communications format Output data  Program mode Of
253. ublication Industrial Automation  Wiring and Grounding Guidelines For Noise Immunity  publication  1770 4 1     This equipment is classified as open equipment and must be mounted in an  enclosure during operation to provide safety protection     Summary of Changes    Introduction This release of this document contains updated information  Changes are  designated by change bars in margin  as shown to the right     New Chapter Arrangement This manual has been modified slightly  in terms of its chapter content  For  information on diagnostic I O modules  see Chapter 4     New Information Chapter 7 contains updated backplane current and simplified schematic  information for some I O modules where noted     Appendix  D contains information on driving motor starters with  ControlLogix I O modules     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    What This Preface Contains    Who Should Use This Manual    Purpose of This Manual    Preface    About This User Manual    This preface describes how to use this manual  The following table  describes what this preface contains and its location        For information about  See page   Who Should Use This Manual  Purpose of This Manual   Conventions and Related Terms  Related Products and Documentation  Rockwell Automation Support                         You must be able to program and operate an Allen Bradley ControlLogix     Logix5550 controller to efficiently use your digital I O modules     We assume that you know how to do this in this manual  
254. uct or packaging is marked        W     e Class   Div 2 Hazardous    lt  gt  Class   Div 2 Hazardous     appROVED    marked for all applicable directives       kwon    Maximum wire size will require extended housing   1756 TBE   Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual   Refer to publication 1770 4 1   Programmable Controller Wiring and Grounding Guidelines       CSA certification   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations     FM approved   Class    Division 2  Group A  B  C  D or nonhazardous locations        Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    7 38 Module Specific Information          1756 0B16l    Configurable features    The following table lists the configurable features this module supports  the  default value and the page of the feature   s description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    Feature Default value Page of description  Communications format Output data  Program mode off 6 11  Program to fault transition Disabled 6 11  Fault mode off 6 11   Wiring example  Use the following example to wire your module   DC 0 Isolated  Isolated OC O    0    De  lOe O a O sourcing        4 3 G     NOTES  A
255. ucts to ControlLogix input modules  see the I O Systems Overview   publication CIG 2 1     ControlLogix output modules may be used to drive a variety of output  devices  Typical output devices compatible with the ControlLogix outputs  include     e motor starters  e solenoids  e indicators    When designing a system  make sure that the ControlLogix outputs can  supply the necessary surge and continuous current for proper operation   Take care to make sure that the surge and continuous current are not  exceeded  Damage to the module could result     When sizing output loads  check the documentation supplied with the  output device for the surge and continuous current needed to operate the  device     The ControlLogix outputs are capable of directly driving the ControlLogix  inputs  The exceptions are the ac and dc diagnostic input modules  When  diagnostics are used a shunt resistor is required for leakage current  See  chapter 6 for more information    For more information specifically on the compatibility of motor starters to  ControlLogix output modules  see Appendix D   For more information on compatibility of other Allen Bradley Company    products to ControlLogix output modules  see the I O Systems Overview   publication CIG 2 1     Using Features Common to  ControlLogix Standard Digital  1 0 Modules    ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features 3 3    The following features are common to all ControlLogix standard digital I O  modules     Removal and Insertion Und
256. up 0     I l  Fuse Blown Word 1                                                                                                                A blown fuse for any point group sets the bit for that  point group in the Fuse Blown Word and also sets    the appropriate bit bits in the Module Fault Word Group 1 Group 0                                                                                                                   Field Power Loss Word 1  1756 OA8D only   A loss of field power from any group sets the bit for   that point in the Field Power Loss Word and also   sets the appropriate bits in the Module Fault Word  No Load Word 1                                                                                                          ANo Load condition for any point sets the bit for  that point in the No Load Word and also sets the  appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word                                                                                                                Output Verify Word 1  41457  An Output Verify condition for any point sets the  bit for that point in the Output Verify Word and also  sets the appropriate bit in the Module Fault Word  Chapter Summary and In this chapter you learned about   What   s Next    determining input module compatibility   determining output module compatibility   using features common to ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O modules  using features specific to ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules  using fea
257. urrent 3mA per output  Maximum On State Voltage Drop 400mV dc   1A  Maximum Off State Leakage Current 1mA per point  Output Delay Time  Off to On 1ms maximum  On to Off 1ms maximum  Diagnostic Functions   Short Trip 1 8A   24V dc  Output ON  then short   4 1A   24V dc for 18ms  Output ON into short   Time stamp of diagnostics     1ms  Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum  reference to the CST       Configurable Fault States per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Configurable States in Program Mode per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default                                      Fusing Electronically fused per group  Reverse Polarity Protection None   If module is wired incorrectly  outputs may be damaged   Isolation Voltage  Group to group 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s   250V ac maximum continuous voltage between groups   User to system 100  tested at 2546V dc for 1s  Module Keying  Backplane  Software configurable  RTB Screw Torque  NEMA  7 9 inch pounds  0 8 1Nm   RTB Keying User defined mechanical keying  RTB and Housing 20 Position RTB  1756 TBNH or TBSH   Environmental Conditions  Operating Temperature 0 to 60  C  32 to 140  F   Storage Temperature  40 to 85  C   40 to 185  F   Relative Humidity 5 to 95  noncondensing  Conductors Wire Size 22 14 gauge  2mm   stranded   3 64 inch  1 2mm  insulation maximum  Category 423  Screwdriver Blade Width for RTB 5 16 inch  8mm  maximum  Agency Certification     when prod
258. ut filter time OFF ON  1ms 3 8  ON OFF  1ms  Communications format Input data             Wiring example    Use the following example to wire your module              DC COM                                     IN 1  IN 3  Group 0 IN 5  IN 7  NOTES  All terminals with the same name are  connected together on the module  GND 0  For example  DC COM can be  connected to either terminal marked IN 9  GND O  IN 11  When you daisy chain from a group to Group 1 IN 13  another RTB  always connect the daisy  chain to the terminal directly connected IN 15  to the supply wire  as shown   GND 1  This wiring example shows a single  voltage source   Daisy chain to  other RTBs _  Simplified schematic  5V  IN 0 i  C  I  f  GND 0 V  lt   G j    4 j  GND        gt       ControlBus Display  Interface  30183 M    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999          Tr                                                        ico                                                                                 SISISISISISICISIEIS          llelelelelelelele                                                                   D                      IN 0  IN 2  IN 4    IN 6    GND 0    IN 8    IN 10    IN 12    IN 14    GND 1    Group 0    aa re A    Group 1          40177 M    LED indicator           DC INPUT          ST 01234567 oL  ST 8 9 101112131415 K                      20945 M             Module Specific Information 7 9       1756 IB16 Specifications       Number of Inputs    16  8 points common        Module 
259. ut modules 8 1  Output modules 8 2  Listen Only Connections P 3  2 10   6 6  6 8  Listen Only Rack Connection 2 13  Listen Only Rack Optimization 2 13    Local Chassis  Using input modules 2 4  Using output modules 2 8  Logix5550 Controller P 1  2 1  Loss of Field Power Detection  Diagnostic output modules 4 19    M  Major Revision P 3  3 4  4 4  6 3  Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 5  Marking diagnostic data changes 4 8  Message Instructions  In ladder logic B 1  Minor Revision P 3  3 4  4 4  6 3  Choosing in RSLogix 5000 6 5  Module Compatibility  Diagnostic input modules 4 1  Diagnostic output modules 4 2  Standard input modules 3 1  Standard output modules 3 2  Module Fault Word  Diagnostic input modules 4 20   4 21  Diagnostic output modules 4 22   4 23  Standard input modules 3 14  Standard output modules 3 15   3 16  Module Identification Information  1 4  B 13  Module Services  In ladder logic B 2  Module Status  Retrieving 1 4  B 13  Module Tags  Accessing in RSLogix 5000 6 22   A 10  Diagnostic input modules A 6  Diagnostic output modules A 8  Standard input modules A 3  Standard output modules A 4  Multiple Owners  Of input modules 2 11    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    N  Network Update Time  NUT  P 3  No Load Detection  Diagnostic output modules 4 16  No Load Word  Diagnostic output modules 4 22   4 23    0  Open Wire Detection 4 12  Open Wire Word  Diagnostic input modules 4 20   4 2   Output Data Echo 2 7  2 10  3 9  4 14
260. ve the multiple tags to from the  message instruction source destination tags  The table below lists the copy  instruction parameters need for these services   Table B B  Copy Instruction Parameters for Module Services  Source Destination   Description  Copy Instruction  COP    This instruction moves data to   Tag in MSG from generic source destination buffers  ec  Source Destination Length   bytes   Pulse_Test_Paramet   Determines which point to perform the Enable_32_points Pulse_Test_Parameters   4  ers SINT 10  pulse test on  Each bit corresponds toa   DINT  0   point  Only test one point at a time   Determines maximum pulse width of the   Pulse_Width Pulse_Test_Parameters    2  pulse test in ms  Pulse test inverts state   INT 4   of the output up to the maximum  specified time  Units are in 100s  increments  Default tag value   2ms  i e   20    For AC modules only  this specifies how   Zero_Cross_Delay Pulse_Test_Parameters    2  long to delay after the zero cross before   INT 6   performing the pulse test  Optimum time  to perform pulse test is at its peak AC  voltage  Units are in 100s increments   Default tag value   4ms  i e  40    Specifies how long to wait after the pulse   Output_Verify_Delay Pulse_Test_Parameters    2  is completed before declaring a fault  INT 8   Output verify delay parameter is needed  to account for the hardware propagation  delay  Units are in 100us increments   Default tag value   2ms  i e  20    CST_Information Current CST Time from Module 
261. when either one    of two things occur     e at the end of every one of its program scans  local chassis only  and or  e atthe rate specified in the module   s RPI    When an output module physically resides in a remote chassis  with respect  to the owner controller   the owner controller sends data to the output  module only at the RPI rate specified for the module  Updates are not  performed at the end of the owner controller   s program scan     Whenever the module receives data from the controller  it immediately  multicasts the output commands it received to the rest of the system  The  actual output data is echoed by the output module as input data and  multicast back out onto the network  This is called Output Data Echo  The  Output Data Echo also may contain fault and diagnostic information   depending on the module type     Important  In this Producer Consumer model  the output module is the    Consumer of the controller   s output data and the Producer of  the data echo     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    2 8 Digital 1 0 Operation Within the ControlLogix System       Output Modules in  a Local Chassis    Output Modules in  a Remote Chassis    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    When specifying an RPI value for a digital output module  you are  instructing the owner controller when to broadcast the output data to the  module  If the module resides in the same chassis as the owner controller   the module will receive the data almost immediately after the  owne
262. wing ControlLogix digital input modules are standard input  modules  1756 IA16  IA16I  IB16  IB16I  IB32  IC16  IH16I  IM16I  IN16    The configurable features for a standard input module are     e Change of State  e Input Filter Times    Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on page 6 4  Use the  following page to configure your standard input module     Module Properties   Local 4  1756 IA16 2 1   x        Enable Change of State Input Filter Time  ms     Change filter  times here                            SU  51  51  50  5   lt 1  lt 1   kakalaka iaaa                    sl  sl    Cancel    lt  Back   Next gt    Finish  gt  gt    Help         The following ControlLogix digital output modules are standard output  modules  1756 OA16  OA16I  OA8  OA8E  OB16E  OB16I  OB32  OB8   OB8EI  OC8  OH8I  ON8  OW161  OX8I    The configurable features for a standard output module are     Output State in Program Mode   Output State in Fault Mode   Transition from Program State to Fault State  Field Power Loss Detection   1756 OA8E only  Diagnostic Latching   1756 OA8E only    Create a new module in RSLogix 5000 as described on page  6 4  Use the  following page to configure your standard output module     Module Properties   Local 4  1756 OA8E 2 1  x     Output State During Enable Diagnostics for  Enable Diag   Program Mode Fault Mode Field Power Loss Latching  om                              Enable Field Power Loss here    Communications Failure    Choose the state of outp uts
263. y 1999    Module Specific Information 7 39       1756 0B16l Specifications       Number of Outputs    16  individually isolated        Module Location    1756 ControlLogix Chassis       Backplane Current    350mA   5 1V dc  amp  2 5mA   24V de   Total backplane power 1 85W                 Maximum Power Dissipation  Module  3 6W   60  C   Thermal Dissipation 12 28 BTU hr   Output Voltage Range 10 30V de   Output Current Rating   Resistive  Per Point 2A maximum   30  C  amp  1A maximum   60  C  Linear derating   Per Module 8A maximum   30  C  amp  4A maximum   60  C  Linear derating    Inductive  Per Point 1A maximum   60  C  Per Module    8A maximum   30  C  amp  4A maximum   60  C  Linear derating        Surge Current per Point    4A for 10ms each  repeatable every 2s                   Minimum Load Current 1mA per point  Maximum On State Voltage Drop 1 2V dc   2A  Maximum Off State Leakage Current 0 5mA per point  Output Delay Time  Off to on 1ms maximum  On to off 2ms maximum  Scheduled Outputs Synchronization within 16 7s maximum  reference to the CST       Configurable Fault States per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Configurable States in Program Mode per Point    Hold Last State  ON or OFF  OFF is the default        Fusing    Not protected   Fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs  See  publication 1492 2 12        Reverse Polarity Protection    None  If module is wired incorrectly  outputs may be damaged         Isolation Voltage  Chan
264. y indicates the ON OFF state of the field  device     e Module status   This green display indicates the module   s  communication status     e Fault status   This display is only found on some modules and indicates  the presence or absence of various faults     e Fuse status   This display is only found on electronically fused modules  and indicates the state of the module   s fuse     For examples of LED indicators on ControlLogix digital I O modules  see  Chaptef 7     Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    3 8 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features    Using Features Specific to  Standard Input Modules    Publication 1756 6 5 8   July 1999    Full Class   Division 2 Compliance    All ControlLogix digital I O modules maintain CSA Class I Division 2  system certification  This allows the ControlLogix system to be placed in  an environment other than only a 100  hazard free     Important  Modules should not be pulled under power  nor should a  powered RTB be removed  in a Class I Division 2 environment     CE CSA UL FM Agency Approvals    Any ControlLogix digital I O modules that have obtained CE CSA UL FM  agency approval are marked as such  Ultimately  all digital modules will  have these agency approvals and be marked accordingly     These features are common to all ControlLogix digital input modules     Data Transfer on Either Change of State or Cyclic Time  Your ControlLogix input module will send data in one of two ways        Requested Packet Interval   a use
265. ystem Removable Terminal Block  RTB  or a Bulletin 1492 Interface Module  cable that connects to an IFM to connect all field side wiring     Before you install and use your module you should have already     e installed and grounded a 1756 chassis and power supply  To install these  products  refer to publications 1756 5 1 and 1756 5 2    e ordered and received an RTB or IFM and its components for your  application     Important  RTBs and IFMs are not included with your module purchase                                                                                         Table 1 A  Types of ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules   Catalog Description  RTB   Number    1756 IA16 79 132V ac 16 pt  input module 20 pin  1756 IA16l 79 132V ac 16 pt  isolated input module 36 pin  1756 IA8D 79 132V ac 8pt  diagnostic input module 20 pin  1756 IB16 10 31V dc 16 pt  input module 20 pin  1756 IB16D 10 30V dc diagnostic input module 36 pin  1756 IB16l 10 30V dc 16 pt  isolated input module 36 pin  1756 IB32 10 31V dc 32 pt  input module 36 pin  1756 IC16 30 60V dc 16 pt  input module 20 pin  1756 lH16l 90 146V dc 16 pt  isolated input module 36 pin  1756 IM16l 159 265V ac 16 pt  isolated input module 36 pin  1756 IN16 10 30V ac 16 pt  input module 20 pin  1756 0A16 74 265V ac 16 pt  output module 20 pin  1756 0A16l 74 265V ac 16 pt  isolated output module 36 pin  1756 0A8 74 265V ac 16 pt  output module 20 pin  1756 0A8D 74 132V ac 8 pt  diagnostic output module 20 pin  1756 OA8E 74 132V ac 8
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
  ジャー炊飯器  DigiTech Polara Owner`s Manual  tomate - Biblioteca do Incaper  USER'S GUIDE - Xitron Technologies  Belkin N150 User's Manual  Samsung WA11R3 User Manual  Manual Técnico Español  PowerPoint プレゼンテーション  Samsung NX2000 (20-50 mm) Kasutusjuhend    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file